You are on page 1of 414

2005 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual

Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Owner's Identification Form


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................59
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Features.........................................................................................................................................................187
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................277
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................291
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................313
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................355
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................383
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................397
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................401
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Main Menu

Owners Identification

OWNER This Owners Manual should be considered


a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owners Manual covers all models of


ADDRESS the Odyssey. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.

The information and specifications included


CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin dun Manuel du Conducteur
en franais, veuillez demander
ADDRESS votre concessionnaire de
STREET commander le numro de pice
33SHJC00

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/


POSTAL CODE
OWNERS SIGNATURE

DEALERS SIGNATURE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Main Menu

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Odyssey was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your Honda, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Event Data Recorders
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights This vehicle is equipped with one or
and responsibilities. more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual or sensing and diagnostic modules.
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of


California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

i
Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you dont follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you dont follow instructions.

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you dont follow


possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

ii
Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.61, 62) SHIFT LEVER HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/
GAUGES (P.71) (P.294) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.188)
SEAT HEATER
MIRROR SWITCHES (P.160)
CONTROLS
(P.168)
Seat Memory
Switches
(P.161)
POWER GLOVE BOXES
DOOR LOCK (P.180)
SWITCHES
(P.137)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.163)

AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
FUEL FILL SYSTEM
DOOR RELEASE (P.199, 230)
(P.279)

HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE ACCESSORY POWER CENTER TRAY


HANDLE PEDAL SOCKETS (P.171)
(P.280) (P.169) (P.182)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

4
Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVERS PEDAL HEADLIGHTS/ MULTI-INFORMATION CRUISE HAZARD WARNING CLOCK

Your Vehicle at a Glance


ADJUSTMENT SWITCH TURN SIGNALS DISPLAY SWITCHES CONTROL BUTTON (P.227)
(P.169) (P.122) (P.75) (P.264) (P.126)

POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
(P.142)
PASSENGER
MOONROOF AIRBAG OFF
(P.166) INDICATOR
(P.33)
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH (P.139) / REAR WINDOW
VSA OFF SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.302) (P.126)

PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH
(P.271)
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR
VSA OFF ENTERTAINMENT
SWITCH SYSTEM
(P.302) (P.199, 230)
HORN

STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD LIGHT CONTROL


AUDIO CONTROLS ADJUSTMENT WIPERS/WASHERS SWITCH
(P.228) (P.127) (P.121) (P.183)

: To use the horn, press the pad around the H logo.


Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

5
Main Menu

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

6
Main Menu

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22 All Children Should Sit in a Back
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Seat ............................................ 37
yourself and your passengers. It Tensionners.............................. 23 The Passengers Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 37

Driver and Passenger Safety


explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About Your If You Must Drive with
it tells you how to properly restrain Airbags ...................................... 25 Several Children ...................... 39
infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ....... 25 If a Child Requires Close
How Your Front Airbags Attention ................................... 39
Work.......................................... 27 Additional Safety Precautions .... 40
Advanced Airbag ......................... 29 Protecting Infants and Small
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 How Your Side Airbags Children .................................... 41
Your Vehicles Safety Features........ 9 Work.......................................... 30 Protecting Infants ........................ 41
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Protecting Small Children .......... 42
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 Work.......................................... 32 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 43
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 44
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14 How the Side Airbag Off With LATCH ................................ 45
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15 Indicator Works ....................... 33 With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 48
5. Fasten and Position the Seat How the Passenger Airbag With a Tether ............................... 50
Belts ...................................... 16 Off Indicator Works ................ 33 Protecting Larger Children ............ 51
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Airbag Service .............................. 34 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
Position ................................. 19 Additional Safety Precautions .... 35 Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 20 Protecting Children General When Can a Child Sit in Front ... 53
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20 Guidelines ................................. 36 Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Additional Information About Your All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Seat Belts .................................. 22 Restrained ................................ 36 Safety Labels .................................... 57
Seat Belt System Components ... 22
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

7
Main Menu Table of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

Youll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So dont drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and dont let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not in the front seat. Infants
are the ones we consider to be the and small children should be Control Your Speed
most important. restrained in a child seat. Larger Excessive speed is a major factor in
children should use a booster and a crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt lap/shoulder belt until they can use the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in the belt properly without a booster risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see page 36 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 16 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Dont Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even maintenance (see page 315 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

8
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many


(4) (1) (9) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(11) during a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety


(9)
Some features do not require any
(3) action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
(7) zones; a collapsible steering column;
(2) and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(10)(8) (6)
(7)
(5) (1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(2) (6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

9
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicles Safety Features

However, you and your passengers Seat Belts


cant take full advantage of these Your vehicle is equipped with seat
features unless you remain sitting in belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly
a proper position and always wear increases the chance of serious
your seat belts. In fact, some safety Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even
features can contribute to injuries if an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags.
they are not used properly. to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your
The following pages explain how you passengers always wear seat
can take an active role in protecting Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly.
yourself and your passengers. Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts:
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicles built-in safety features.
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
In addition, most states and all rollovers.
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

10
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Help keep you from being thrown Airbags


against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.

Driver and Passenger Safety


Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position


should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot Your vehicle has a Supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to
completely protect you in every Restraint System (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the
crash. But in most cases, seat belts airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger
can reduce your risk of serious chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side
injury. passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 30 for more
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags
What you should do: Always wear 27 for more information on how work).
your seat belt, and make sure you your front airbags work).
wear it properly.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

11
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicles Safety Features

The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible.
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions. The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
Airbags can pose hazards. To do can maximize your safety.
their job, airbags must inflate with
Your vehicle also has side curtain tremendous force. So while Remember, however, that no safety
airbags to help protect the heads of airbags help save lives, they can system can prevent all injuries or
the driver, front passenger, and cause minor injuries or more deaths that can occur in a severe
passengers in the outer rear seating serious or even fatal injuries if crash, even when seat belts are
positions during a moderate to occupants are not properly properly worn and the airbags deploy.
severe side impact (see page 32 for restrained or sitting properly.
more information on how your side
curtain airbags work).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

12
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction 1.Close and Lock the Doors 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors and
protect the driver, adult passengers, tailgate are closed and locked.

Driver and Passenger Safety


and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive Your vehicle has a door and
or ride in the front. tailgate monitor indicator on
the instrument panel to
See pages 36 40 for important indicate when a specific door or the
guidelines on how to properly tailgate is not tightly closed.
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your Locking the doors reduces the
vehicle. chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from Adjust the drivers seat as far to the
accidentally opening a door and rear as possible while allowing you to
falling out. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
Locking the doors also helps prevent seat as far to the rear as possible.
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.

See page 137 for how to lock the


doors, and page 67 for how the door
and tailgate monitor indicator works. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

13
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs


wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
If you cannot get far enough away the seat is locked in position.
from the steering wheel and still Adjust the drivers seat-back to a
reach the controls, we recommend See page 149 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
that you extend the adjustable drivers front seats. leaving ample space between your
foot pedals (Touring model only, see chest and the airbag cover in the
page 169 ), or investigate whether center of the steering wheel.
some type of adaptive equipment
may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

14
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head


can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

Driver and Passenger Safety


death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.

Reclining a seat-back so that the


shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupants chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the drivers head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 152 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See page 150 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

15
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

5.Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the belt again
Belts to remove any slack, then check that
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, the belt rests across the center of
then tug on the belt to make sure the your chest and over your shoulder.
belt is securely latched. Check that This spreads the forces of a crash
the belt is not twisted, because a over the strongest bones in your
twisted belt can cause serious upper body.
injuries in a crash.

The center seating position of the


third row has a detachable seat belt Improperly positioning the seat
anchor that can be unlatched and belts can cause serious injury
released, to allow the seat to be or death in a crash.
folded down. See page 17 for how to Position the lap part of the belt as
unlatch and relatch the seat belt low as possible across your hips, Make sure all seat belts are
anchor. then pull up on the shoulder part of properly positioned before
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. driving.
The plus-one seat on EX models that This lets your strong pelvic bones
can be installed in the center seating take the force of a crash and reduces
position of the second row also has a the chance of internal injuries. If the seat belt touches or crosses
detachable seat belt anchor. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

16
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in the


Center Position of the Third Row
LATCH ANCHOR

Driver and Passenger Safety


PLATE LATCH

RELEASE
BUTTONS
ANCHOR
ANCHOR BUCKLE
The front seats and second row seats LATCH
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of an anchor, The plus-one seat on EX model also has Insert the hook at the end of the
squeeze the two release buttons, and this type of seat belt. anchor latch into the anchor buckle
slide the anchor up or down as Pull out the anchor latch and the by lining up the triangle marks on
needed (the anchor has four latch plate from each holding slot in the anchor latch and buckle. Make
positions). the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt sure the belt is not twisted. Push the
to extend it. anchor latch until it locks. Then
follow the procedure for fastening an
ordinary seat belt (see page 16 ).

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

17
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a


lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
Using a seat belt with the behind your back. This could cause
detachable seat belt anchor very serious injuries in a crash.
unlatched increases the chance
of serious injury or death in a If a seat belt does not seem to work
crash. as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable seat No one should sit in a seat with an
belt anchor is correctly latched. inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
To unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor before folding down the seat- See page 20 for additional
back, insert the latch plate into the information about your seat belts
slot on the side of the anchor buckle and how to take care of them.
and allow the seat belt to retract.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch into their holding slots in the
ceiling.
When the seat-back is returned to its
upright position, be sure to latch the
detachable seat belt anchor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

18
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of


Position position in the front seat can be
After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash Sitting improperly or out of
their seats and put on seat belts, it is by striking interior parts of the position can result in serious

Driver and Passenger Safety


very important that they continue to vehicle or being struck by an injury or death in a crash.
sit upright, well back in their seats, inflating front airbag.
with their feet on the floor, until the Always sit upright, well back in
vehicle is parked and the engine is the seat, with your feet on the
off. floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the


chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

19
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions
upright and adjust the seat as far Never let passengers ride in the
back as possible while allowing full cargo area or on top of a folded-
control of the vehicle. When riding down back seat. If they do, they
as a front passenger, adjust the seat could be very seriously injured in a
as far back as possible. crash.

This will reduce the risk of injuries Passengers should not stand up or
to both you and your unborn child change seats while the vehicle is
that can be caused by a crash or an moving. A passenger who is not
inflating front airbag. wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
Each time you have a checkup, ask against the inside of the vehicle,
your doctor if its okay for you to against other occupants, or out of
If you are pregnant, the best way to drive. the vehicle.
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a Two people should never use the
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, same seat belt. If they do, they
and keep the lap part of the belt as could be very seriously injured in a
low as possible across the hips. crash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

20
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on


belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked SRS AIRBAG
shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper

Driver and Passenger Safety


reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
the seat belt and increase the propelled inside the vehicle and
chance of serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or


between yourself and a front near a front door. If a side airbag
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
objects on your lap, or driving with cup holder or other hard object
a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms away


from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

21
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body.


Your seat belt system includes lap/ The lap/shoulder belt goes over
shoulder belts in all seating positions. your shoulder, across your chest, The seat belts in all positions except
The front seat belts are also and across your hips. the drivers have an additional
equipped with automatic seat belt locking mechanism that must be
tensioners. To fasten the belt, insert the latch activated to secure a child seat (see
plate into the buckle, then tug on the page 48 ).
The seat belt system belt to make sure the buckle is
includes an indicator on the latched (see page 16 for how to If the shoulder part of the belt is
instrument panel and a beeper to properly position the belt). pulled all the way out, the locking
remind you to fasten your seat belt. mechanism will activate. The belt
To unlock the belt, push the red will retract, but it will not allow the
If you turn the ignition switch to ON PRESS button on the buckle. Guide passenger to move freely.
(II) without fastening your belt, a the belt across your body so that it
beeper will sound and the indicator retracts completely. After exiting the To deactivate the locking
will flash. If you do not fasten your vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
seat belt before the beeper stops, the way and will not get closed in the let the seat belt fully retract. To
indicator will stop flashing but door. refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
remain on. as far as needed.
All seat belts have an emergency
If you continue driving without locking retractor. In normal driving,
fastening your seat belt, the beeper the retractor lets you move freely in
will sound and the indicator will flash your seat while it keeps some
again at regular intervals. tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

22
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance
activate primarily in frontal collisions, For safety, you should check the
and they should activate in any condition of your seat belts regularly.
collision severe enough to cause

Driver and Passenger Safety


front-airbag inflation. Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
The tensioners are also designed to that the latches work smoothly and
activate when sensors detect side the belts retract easily. Any belt that
impact and when your vehicle is is not in good condition or working
about to roll over (see page 32 ). properly will not provide good
protection and should be replaced as
The tensioners can also be activated soon as possible.
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, Honda provides a lifetime warranty
For added protection, the front seat the airbags would not be needed, but on seat belts for U.S. models. See
belts are equipped with automatic the additional restraint could be your Honda Warranty Information
seat belt tensioners. When activated, helpful. booklet for details.
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and When the tensioners are activated,
a front passenger in place. the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

23
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,


it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
The dealer should also inspect the needed.
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.

For information on how to clean the


seat belts, see page 343 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

24
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components Your Airbag System includes:

(6) (1) (9) Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint


System) front airbags. The drivers

Driver and Passenger Safety


(10) airbag is stored in the center of
(12) (2) (9) the steering wheel; the front
passengers airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG (see page 27 ).
(5) Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
(3) in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE
(4) (13) AIRBAG (see page 30 ).
(11) (11) Two side curtain airbags, one for
(7) (8) each side of the vehicle. The
(5) (4) airbags are stored in the ceiling
(1) Drivers Front Airbag (8) Front Passengers Weight Sensors above the side windows. All pillars
(2) Passengers Front Airbag (9) Front Impact Sensors are marked SIDE CURTAIN
(3) Control Unit (10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners (11) Side Impact Sensors AIRBAG (see page 32 ).
(5) Side Airbags (12) Occupant Position Detection
(6) Side Curtain Airbag System (OPDS) Sensors
(7) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (13) Rollover Sensor CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

25
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Automatic seat belt tensioners A drivers seat position sensor that An indicator on the dashboard that
(see page 23 ). monitors the distance of the seat alerts you that the passengers
from the front airbag. If the seat is side airbag has been turned off
Sensors that can detect a too far forward, the airbag will (see page 33 ).
moderate to severe front impact or inflate with less force (see page
side impact. 29 ). An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passengers
Sensors that can detect whether a Weight sensors that monitor the front airbag has been turned off
child is in the passengers side weight on the front passengers (see page 33 ).
airbag path and automatically turn seat. These automatically turn off
the airbag off (see page 33 ). the passengers front airbag if Emergency backup power in case
they detect an infant or small child your vehicles electrical system is
A sophisticated electronic system may be in the seat (see page 29 ). disconnected in a crash.
that continually monitors and
records information about the An indicator on the instrument
sensors, the control unit, the panel that alerts you to a possible
airbag activators, the seat belt problem with your airbags (see
tensioners, and driver and front page 32 ).
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is in the ON (II) position. A rollover sensor that monitors
the degree and rate your vehicle
may roll over and automatically
deploy the side curtain airbags and
activate the front seat belt
tensioners if needed (see page 32 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

26
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the airbag helps protect your
head and chest.

Driver and Passenger Safety


Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a


collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they wont
detect the vehicles rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the drivers visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the drivers airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the drivers and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passengers airbags, at the time and system has turned the passengers
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 33 ).

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

27
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
After a crash, you may see what belt.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbags surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupants belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time It the occupants belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

28
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

Driver and Passenger Safety


caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
PASSENGERS
For both advanced airbags to work SEAT WEIGHT
properly: DRIVERS SENSOR
SEAT
POSITION
Occupants must sit upright and SENSOR
wear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on or The drivers advanced front airbag The passengers advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. If the sensors detect
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will an infant or small child may be in the
inflate with less force, regardless of seat, the system will automatically
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. turn the passengers front airbag off.
put their feet under the front seats.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the drivers
seating position.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

29
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag OFF (see page
33 ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
If there is no passenger in the front items in the seat-back pocket.
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator
will not come on.

To ensure that the passengers


advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the If you ever have a moderate to
weight on the front passengers seat. severe side impact, sensors will
This includes: detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
A rear passenger pushing or either the drivers or the passengers
pulling on the back of the side airbag and activate the seat belt
passengers seat. tensioner.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

30
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the Side Airbag Off Indicator
side impact. If the impact is on the To reduce the risk of injury from an comes on (see page 33 ), have the
passengers side, the passengers inflating side airbag, your vehicle has passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there an automatic cutoff system for the passenger is out of the airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety


is no passenger. passengers side airbag. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, this system
should wear their seat belts and sit is designed to shut off the side There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. airbag if a child leans into the side the moment the passenger moves
airbags deployment path. into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
The side airbag may also shut off if a on or goes off.
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans A front seat passenger should not
sideways into the airbags use a cushion or other object as a
deployment path. backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

31
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passengers How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passengers side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
In a Rollover
A rollover sensor monitors the When you turn the ignition switch to
degree and rate your vehicle may roll ON (II), this indicator will come on
over and automatically deploy the briefly then go out. This tells you the
side curtain airbags and activate the system is working properly.
front seat belt tensioners (see page
23 ). If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
In a rollover toward the front you should have the system checked
passengers side of the vehicle, both by your dealer. For example:
In a Side Impact side curtain airbags will inflate and
In a moderate to severe side impact, the front seat belt tensioners will If the SRS indicator does not come
sensors will detect rapid acceleration activate even if there are no on after you turn the ignition
and signal the control unit to occupants on that side of the vehicle. switch to ON (II).
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt To get the best protection from the If the indicator stays on after the
tensioner on the drivers or the side curtain airbags, occupants engine starts.
passengers side of the vehicle. should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats. If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

32
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada This indicator
need them. alerts you that the

Driver and Passenger Safety


passengers side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does not mean there is a
Ignoring the SRS indicator can problem with your side airbags.
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or When you turn the ignition switch to
tensioners do not work properly. ON (II), the indicator should come
on briefly and then go off (see page
Have your vehicle checked by a 64 ). If it doesnt come on, stays on,
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
dealer as soon as possible if or comes on while driving without a INDICATOR
the SRS indicator alerts you to passenger in the front seat, have the
a possible problem. system checked. This indicator alerts you that the
passengers front airbag is shut off
because weight sensors detect an
infant or small child may be in the
front passengers seat. It does not
mean there is a problem with the
airbag.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

33
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service If your vehicle has a moderate to
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually severe impact. Even if your
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no airbags do not inflate, your dealer
come on. parts you can safely service. should inspect the drivers seat
However, you must have your position sensor and the front
If the indicator comes on with no vehicle serviced if: passengers weight sensors to
passenger in the front, or with an make sure they are operating
adult in the seat, there may be a An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag properly.
problem with the advanced airbag that has deployed must be
system. Have the vehicle checked by replaced along with the control
the dealer as soon as possible. unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator tensioners must also be replaced.
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the Do not try to remove or replace
airbag cutoff threshold. any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by your dealer or a
If this happens, have the passenger knowledgeable body shop.
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. If the passenger must ride in The SRS indicator alerts you to a
front, move the seat as far to the problem. Take your vehicle to an
rear as possible, and have the authorized dealer as soon as
passenger sit upright and wear the possible. If you ignore this
seat belt properly. indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

34
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-


Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

Driver and Passenger Safety


protection. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.

Do not remove or modify a front


seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
drivers seat position sensor or the
front passengers weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact American
Honda at 800-999-1009.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

35
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained


Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 51 55 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 41 51 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

36
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passengers Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passengers front airbag can

Driver and Passenger Safety


safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passengers front airbag is quite too far forward, or the childs head is
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
advanced front airbag system, which
Children who ride in back are less can automatically turn the Larger Children
likely to be injured by striking passengers front airbag off (see Children who have outgrown child
interior vehicle parts during a page 29 ), please follow the seats are also at risk of being injured
collision or hard braking. Also, guidelines below. or killed by an inflating passengers
children cannot be injured by an front airbag. Whenever possible,
inflating front airbag when they ride Infants larger children should sit in the back
in the back. Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
with a passengers front airbag. If belt. (See page 51 for important
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
of the child seat with enough force children.)
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

37
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children General Guidelines

To remind you of the passengers Canadian Models


front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the drivers and
front passengers visors. Please read
and follow the instructions on these
labels.
U.S. Models

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

38
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
seats where children can be properly an infant or small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back

Driver and Passenger Safety


restrained. If you ever have to carry passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
a group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires child than the front.
ride in front: attention.

Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 52 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 13 ).

Have the child sit upright and well


back in the seat (see page 19 ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly


positioned and secured (see page
16 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

39
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Additional Safety Precautions Use childproof door locks to Lock all doors and tailgate when
Never hold an infant or child on prevent children from opening the your vehicle is not in use. Children
your lap. If you are not wearing a doors. This can prevent children who play in vehicles can
seat belt in crash, you could be from accidentally falling out (see accidentally get trapped inside.
thrown forward and crush the page 138 ). Teach your children not to play in
child against the dashboard or a or around vehicles.
seat-back. If you are wearing a Use the power sliding door main
seat belt, the child can be torn switch to prevent children from Keep vehicle keys/remote
from your arms and be seriously operating the sliding doors. This transmitters out of the reach of
hurt or killed. will prevent unintended use of the children. Even very young
doors. children learn how to unlock
Never put a seat belt over yourself vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
and a child. During a crash, the Do not leave children alone in a switch, and open the tailgate,
belt could press deep into the child vehicle. Leaving children without which can lead to accidental injury
and cause serious or fatal injuries. adult supervision is illegal in most or death.
states and Canadian provinces,
Never let two children use the and can be very hazardous.
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a For example, infants and small
crash. children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition can accidentally set the
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

40
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

Driver and Passenger Safety


rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passengers front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-


facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving the seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking the
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat makers weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passengers
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a babys head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

41
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children

In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children Child Seat Placement


recommend that you install the child We strongly recommend placing a
seat directly behind the front forward-facing child seat in a back
passengers seat, move the seat as seat, not the front.
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Even with advanced front airbags,
a smaller rear-facing child seat. which can automatically turn the
passengers front airbag off (see
page 29 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old,
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat
front. makers weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we


recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

42
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat We also recommend selecting a


facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child rather than a flexible, anchor (see
possible, be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with page 45 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety


firmly secured to the vehicle, and the the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. Children (LATCH) system. In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
Conventional child seats must be compatible child seat can be installed
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, using a seat belt.
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two second-
front airbag inflates. row seat and the center seating
position of the third row.
If you must place a forward-
facing child seat in front, move Since LATCH-compatible child seats
the vehicle seat as far back as are easier to install and reduce the
possible, and properly restrain possibility of improper installation,
the child. we recommend selecting this style.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

43
Main Menu Table of Contents

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Whatever type of seat you choose, to Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
provide proper protection, a child After selecting a proper child seat, should not reduce the child seats
seat should meet three and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
requirements: there are three main steps in
installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or installing it in a different seating
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box. secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
2. The child seat should be of the the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Make sure the child is properly
proper type and size to fit the child. Tethers for Children) system. A strapped in the child seat
Rear-facing for infants, forward- child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat makers
facing for small children. secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
3. The child seat should fit the can be seriously injured in a crash.
vehicle seating position (or 2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
positions) where it will be used. secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
Before purchasing a conventional forward and from side to side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
child seat, or using a previously verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
purchased one, we recommend that instructions are the same for rear-
you test the seat in the specific A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
vehicle seating position, or positions, should be installed as firmly as
where the seat will be used. possible. However, it does not need
to be rock solid. Some side-to-side
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

44
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with LOWER ANCHOR MARKS


LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Driver and Passenger Safety


Tethers for Children) in the two
second row seats and the center
seating position of the third row.

The lower anchors are located


between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with LOWER
a child seat designed for use with ANCHORS RIGID TYPE
LATCH.
To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
The location of each lower anchor is seat in a second row seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
indicated by a small button above the lower anchors according to the
anchor point. 1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat makers instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

45
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

6. Attach the tether strap hook to the


tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

7. Push and pull the child seat


forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.

FLEXIBLE TYPE ANCHOR

Other LATCH-compatible seats have 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
a flexible-type connector as shown 153 ), then route the tether strap
above. through the legs of the head
restraint, over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat makers instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

46
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

To install a LATCH-compatible child


seat in the center seating position of
the third row:

Driver and Passenger Safety


1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor and retract the seat belt all
the way into the ceiling. Place the
latch plate and anchor latch in
their holding slots (see page 18 ).

2. Follow steps 1 through 4 of the 3. Remove the head restraint, then


second row installation (see pages route the tether strap over the
45 and 46 ). seat-back, making sure the strap is
not twisted.

4. Slide the anchor cover to open it,


then follow steps 6 and 7 of the
second row installation (see page
46 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

47
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/


Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in


all seating positions except the
drivers have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.

If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of the seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
third row, make sure the detachable through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
seat belt anchor is securely latched. to the seat makers instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

48
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety


4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is firmly secured. If
up to remove any slack from the the child seat is not secure,
lap part of the belt. Remember, if unlatch the belt, allow it to retract
the lap part of the belt is not tight, fully, then repeat these steps.
the child seat will not be secure.
To deactivate the locking
To remove slack, it may help to put mechanism and remove a child seat,
weight on the child seat, or push on unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
the back of the seat while pulling up belt, and let the belt fully retract.
on the belt.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

49
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Second Row Installation


Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or the center seating
position of the third row.

Since a tether can provide additional


security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Each second row bucket seat has a 1. After properly securing the child
tether anchorage point at the bottom seat (see page 48 ), lift the head
of the seat-back. restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

50
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children

Third Row Installation Protecting Larger Children


When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the

Driver and Passenger Safety


child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.

The following pages give


instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
ANCHORAGE POINT important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the The center seating position of the
anchor, making sure the strap is third row has an anchorage point on
not twisted. the tailgate sill.

3. Tighten the strap according to the 1. Remove the bead restraint, then
seat makers instructions. route the tether strap over the
seat-back.

2. Slide the anchor cover to open it.

3. Follow step 2 and 3 of the second


row installation. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

51
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit 3. Does the shoulder belt cross


between the childs neck and arm?
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
or death if the passengers front possible, touching the childs
airbag inflates. thighs?

If a child must ride in front, 5. Will the child be able to stay


move the vehicle seat as far seated like this for the whole trip?
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child If you answer yes to all these
sit up properly and wear the questions, the child is ready to wear
seat belt properly. the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt child needs to ride on a booster seat.
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:

1. Does the child sit all the way back


against the seat?

2. Do the childs knees bend


comfortably over the edge of the
seat?

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

52
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or When Can a Larger Child Sit in
low-back. Whichever style you select, Front
make sure the booster meets federal The National Highway Traffic Safety
safety standards (see page 37 ) and Administration and Transport

Driver and Passenger Safety


that you follow the booster seat Canada recommend that all children
makers instructions. age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle If the passengers airbag inflates in a
seat as far to the rear as possible, moderate to severe frontal collision,
and be sure the child is wearing the the airbag can cause serious injuries
seat belt properly. to a child who is unrestrained,
improperly restrained, sitting too
A child may continue using a booster close to the airbag, or out of position.
A child who has outgrown a forward- seat until the tops of their ears are
facing child seat should ride in a even with the top of the vehicles or A side airbag also poses risks. If any
back seat and use a booster seat boosters seat-back. A child of this part of a larger childs body is in the
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them height should be tall enough to use path of a deploying side airbag, the
properly without the booster. the lap/shoulder belt without a child could receive possibly serious
booster seat. injuries.
Some states also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

53
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Of course, children vary widely. And Physical Size If you decide that a child can safely
while age may be one indicator of Physically, a child must be large ride up front, be sure to:
when a child can safely ride in the enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
front, there are other important properly fit (see page 52 ). If the seat Carefully read the owners manual,
factors you should consider. belt does not fit properly, with or and make sure you understand all
without the child sitting on a booster seat belt instructions and all safety
seat, the child should not sit in front. information.

Maturity Move the vehicle seat to the rear-


To safely ride in front, a child must most position.
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat Have the child sit up straight, back
belt properly throughout a ride. against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is


properly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even mature


children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

54
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a seat


Do not let a child wear a seat belt belt. Devices intended to improve a
across the neck. This could result in childs comfort or reposition the
serious neck injuries during a crash. shoulder part of a seat belt can make

Driver and Passenger Safety


the belt less effective and increase
Do not let a child put the shoulder the chance of serious injury in a
part of a seat belt behind the back or crash.
under the arm. This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

55
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicles exhaust contains With the tailgate open, air flow can
carbon monoxide gas. You should pull exhaust gas into your vehicles
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows
vehicle properly. you. and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
The vehicle is raised for an oil even in an unconfined area, adjust
change. the heating and cooling system/
High levels of carbon monoxide can climate control system as follows:
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 1. Select the fresh air mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 2. Select the mode.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the 4. Set the temperature control to a
underside. vehicle out of the garage. comfortable setting.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

56
Main Menu Table of Contents

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD


shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.

Driver and Passenger Safety


If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which is removed by
the owner), contact your dealer for a
replacement.
HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

57
Main Menu Table of Contents

Safety Labels

SUN VISOR
U.S. models Canadian models

DOORJAMB
U.S. models Canadian models

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

58
Main Menu

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Seat Heaters ................................... 160
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 63 Drivers Seat Position Memory
contribute to the daily operation of Gauges .............................................. 71 System......................................... 161
your vehicle. All the essential Multi-Information Display .............. 74 Power Windows ............................. 163
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Moonroof ........................................ 166
Wheel .......................................... 120 Mirrors ............................................ 167

Instruments and Controls


Windshield Wipers and Parking Brake ................................ 169
Washers ...................................... 121 Adjustable Drivers Foot Pedals .. 169
Rear Window Wiper and Interior Convenience Items .......... 170
Washer ........................................ 122 Retractable Center Tray ........... 171
Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 122 Beverage Holders ...................... 171
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 125 Integrated Sunshade ................. 173
Hazard Warning Button ................ 126 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 174
Rear Window Defogger ................ 126 Conversation Mirror ................. 174
Steering Wheel Adjustment ......... 127 Sun Visor .................................... 175
Keys and Locks.............................. 128 Vanity Mirror ............................. 175
Immobilizer System....................... 129 Rear Compartment .................... 175
Ignition Switch ............................... 130 Removable Second Row
Remote Transmitter ...................... 131 Console ................................... 176
Door Locks ..................................... 137 In-Floor Storage Area................ 177
Power Door Locks ..................... 137 Lower Glove Box ....................... 180
Childproof Door Locks ............. 138 Upper Glove Box ....................... 180
Tailgate ....................................... 138 Center Pocket ............................ 181
Power Tailgate ........................... 139 Accessory Power Sockets......... 182
Sliding Doors .................................. 142 AC Power Outlet ........................ 182
Control Locations ............................ 60 Seats ................................................ 148 Interior Lights ................................ 183
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

59
Main Menu Table of Contents

Control Locations

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.61, 62) SHIFT LEVER HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/
GAUGES (P.71) (P.294) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.188)
SEAT HEATER
MIRROR SWITCHES (P.160)
CONTROLS
(P.168)

POWER
DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.137) GLOVE BOXES
(P.180)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.163)

AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
FUEL FILL SYSTEM
DOOR RELEASE (P.199, 230)
(P.279)

HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE ACCESSORY POWER CENTER TRAY


HANDLE PEDAL SOCKETS (P.171)
(P.280) (P.169) (P.182)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

60
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel

(LX and EX models) IMMOBILIZER POWER SLIDING VSA ACTIVATION VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM DOOR INDICATOR INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.67) (P.65) (P.65)
(P.67) CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN INDICATOR
(P.69)
CRUISE CONTROL

Instruments and Controls


LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR
(P.66) INDICATOR
(P.69)

FUEL ECONOMY ANTI-LOCK BRAKE


INDICATOR (P.70) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
CHARGING LOW FUEL
SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.68)
(P.63) DOOR AND
TAILGATE OPEN
INDICATOR
(P.67)

HIGH BEAM PARKING BRAKE AND SIDE AIRBAG OFF


INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.69) INDICATOR (P.64)
(P.63)
MALFUNCTION MAINTENANCE LOW OIL PRESSURE SUPPLEMENTAL SEAT BELT
INDICATOR MINDER INDICATOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM REMINDER
LAMP INDICATOR (P.63) INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P.372) (P.70) (P.64) (P.64)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences forInfthe


or
mat
i Canadian
onPr
ovi
dedby: models are noted in the text.
61
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel

(Touring models) LIGHTS-ON IMMOBILIZER VSA VEHICLE STABILITY CRUISE CONTROL


INDICATOR SYSTEM ACTIVATION ASSIST SYSTEM MAIN INDICATOR
(P.66) INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.65) (P.69)
(P.67) (P.65) LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM (P.66)
INDICATOR
(P.63) CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT (P.69)
INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
(P.69) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
FUEL ECONOMY DOOR AND TAILGATE
INDICATOR OPEN INDICATOR
(P.70) (P.67)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P.68)

MALFUNCTION SYSTEM HIGH BEAM PARKING BRAKE AND SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR LAMP MESSAGE INDICATOR BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.372) INDICATOR (P.69) INDICATOR (P.63) (P.64)
(P.70)
LOW OIL SUPPLEMENTAL SEAT BELT REMINDER
PRESSURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.64)
(P.63) (P.64)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences forInfthe


or
mat
i Canadian
onPr
ovi
dedby: models are noted in the text.
62
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many Charging System 2. If it stays on after you fully release
indicators to give you important Indicator the parking brake while the engine
information about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on when the is running, or if it comes on while
engine is running, the battery is not driving, there could be a problem
Malfunction Indicator being charged. For more information, with the brake system. For more
Lamp see page 371 . information, see page 373 .

Instruments and Controls


See page 372 . On the Touring model, you will also
see a CHECK CHARGING If you drive without releasing the
Low Oil Pressure SYSTEM message in the multi- parking brake, a chime will sound.
Indicator information display. On the Touring model, you will also
The engine can be severely damaged see a RELEASE PARKING
if this indicator flashes or stays on U.S. Canada BRAKE message in the multi-
when the engine is running. For information display.
more information, see page 371 .
On the Touring model, you will also Parking Brake and Brake System
see a CHECK ENGINE OIL Indicator
LEVEL message in the multi-
information display. This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

63
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt Reminder Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada


Indicator System Indicator Side Airbag Off
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It you turn the ignition switch to ON This indicator comes on when you
reminds you and your passengers to (II). If it comes on at any other time, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also it indicates a potential problem with it comes on at any other time, it
sounds if you have not fastened your your front airbags. This indicator will indicates that the passengers side
seat belt. also alert you to a potential problem airbag has automatically shut off.
with your side airbags, passengers For more information, see page 33 .
If you turn the ignition switch to ON side airbag automatic cutoff system,
(II) before fastening your belt, the side curtain airbags, automatic seat On the Touring model, you will also
beeper sounds and the indicator belt tensioners, drivers seat position see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
flashes. If you do not fasten your sensor, or the front passengers OFF message in the multi-
seat belt before the beeper stops, the weight sensors. For more information display.
indicator stops flashing but remains information, see page 32 .
on.
On the Touring model, you will also
If you continue driving without see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM
fastening your seat belt, the beeper message in the multi-information
sounds and the indicator flashes display.
again at regular intervals. On the
Touring model, you will also see a
FASTEN SEAT BELT message in
the multi-information display.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

64
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator


(ABS) Indicator (VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for This indicator has three functions:
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), and when ignition switch to ON (II). 1. It comes on as a reminder that you
the ignition switch is turned to have turned off the vehicle

Instruments and Controls


START (III). If it comes on at any If it comes on and stays on at any stability assist (VSA) system.
other time, there is a problem in the other time or it does not come on
ABS; have your vehicle checked at a when you turn the ignition switch to 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
dealer. With the ABS indicator on, ON (II), there is a problem with the page 301 ).
your vehicle still has normal braking VSA system. Take your vehicle to a
ability but no anti-lock braking. For dealer to have it checked. Without 3. It comes on along with the VSA
more information, see page 300 . VSA, your vehicle still has normal system indicator if there is a
driving ability, but will not have VSA problem with the VSA system.
On the Touring model, you will also traction and stability enhancement. On the Touring model, you will
see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM On the Touring model, you will also also see a CHECK VSA
message in the multi-information see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM SYSTEM message in the multi-
display. message in the multi-information information display.
display.
This indicator normally comes on for
For more information, see page 301 . a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). See page
301 for more information.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

65
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Tire Pressure more information, see page 303 . Lights On Indicator
Indicator
On U.S. Touring model only Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires. On EX and Touring models
This indicator normally comes on for Repair or replacement of PAX tires This indicator reminds you that the
a few seconds when you turn the must be done by a Honda dealer or exterior lights are on. It comes on
ignition switch to ON (II). an authorized Michelin PAX system when the light switch is in either the
If it comes on while driving, it means dealer. For more information, see or position. If you turn the
that one or more of your vehicles page 356 . ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
tires are extremely low on pressure. or LOCK (0) without turning off the
You will also see a LOW TIRE light switch, this indicator will
PRESSURE message on the multi- remain on. A reminder chime will
information display. The multi- also sound when you open the drivers
information display will show you door.
which tire has lost the pressure and
how much pressure it has lost (see On the Touring model, this indicator
page 303 ). also comes on when the light switch
is in AUTO and the lights turn on
If this happens, pull to the side of the automatically.
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multi-
information display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service (see page 381 ). For
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

66
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Immobilizer System U.S. Canada Door and Tailgate Open Monitor


Indicator Power Sliding
This indicator comes on for a few Door Indicator
seconds when you turn the ignition On EX model only
switch to ON (II). It will go off if you This indicator comes on for a few
have inserted a properly-coded seconds when you turn the ignition

Instruments and Controls


ignition key. If it is not a properly- switch to ON (II). If it comes on at
coded key, the indicator will blink any other time, there is a problem in
and the engine will not start (see the power sliding door system. With The appropriate light comes on in
page 129 ). this indicator on, move the main this display if the tailgate or any door
switch on the dashboard to the OFF is not closed tightly.
This indicator also blinks several position, and have the system
times when you turn the ignition checked by your dealer as soon as All the lights in the monitor come on
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY possible. You can still open or close for a few seconds when you turn the
(I) or LOCK (0). each sliding door manually. For ignition switch to ON (II).
more information on the power
sliding doors, see page 142 .

On the Touring model, you will also


see a CHECK LEFT SLIDING
DOOR or CHECK RIGHT
SLIDING DOOR message in the
multi-information display.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

67
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Turn Signal and Low Fuel Indicator


Hazard Warning LOW FUEL
Indicators INDICATOR
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicators do not blink
or blink rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page 338 ). Replace the bulb as This indicator comes on as a
soon as possible, since other drivers reminder that you must refuel soon.
cannot see that you are signaling.
On the Touring model, you will also
see a FUEL LOW message in the
When you press the hazard warning multi-information display.
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

68
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

High Beam Indicator Daytime Running Cruise Main Indicator


Lights Indicator
This indicator comes on with the Canadian models only This indicator comes on when you
high beam headlights. For more This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by
information, see page 123 . turn the ignition switch to ON (II) pressing the master button (see page
with the headlight switch off and the 264 ).

Instruments and Controls


On Canadian models, this indicator parking brake set. It should go off if
comes on with reduced brightness you turn on the headlights or release Cruise Control Indicator
when the daytime running lights the parking brake. If it comes on at
(DRL) are on (see page 125 ). any other time, it means there is a This indicator comes on when you
problem with the DRL. There may set the cruise control. See page
Fog Light Indicator also be a problem with the high 264 for information on operating the
Touring model only beam headlights. cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you On the Touring model, you will also
turn on the fog lights. See page see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM in Washer Level Indicator
123 for information on fog light the multi-information display.
operation. Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
comes on (see page 333 ).
On the Touring model, you will also
see a WASHER FLUID LOW
message in the multi-information
display.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

69
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Fuel Economy Maintenance MINDER System Message


Indicator Indicator Indicator
On EX with leather and Touring models On LX and EX models On Touring model
While the engine is operating in its This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on when there
most economical range, this maintenance main items and sub is a system message in the multi-
indicator comes on and stays on. It items will be displayed in the information display. Press the INFO
goes off when your vehicle uses odometer/trip meter display. See button on the steering wheel to see
extra fuel. page 315 for more information on the message (see page 79 ).
the maintenance minder.
Most of the time, this indicator
This indicator goes off when your comes on along with other indicators
dealer resets it after completing the in the instrument panel such as the
required maintenance service. seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

70
Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges

LX and EX models Temperature Gauge


This shows the temperature of the
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER engines coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer

Instruments and Controls


FUEL GAUGE
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
TEMPERATURE safely to the side of the road. For
GAUGE instructions and precautions on
checking the engines cooling
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TRIP METER TRIP METER
TEMPERATURE SELECT/RESET
system, see page 369 .
KNOB
Touring model Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
FUEL GAUGE off the ignition.

TEMPERATURE
GAUGE Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
MULTI-INFORMATION TRIP METER SELECT/ cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
DISPLAY RESET KNOB
the catalytic converter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

71
Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges

Odometer Trip Meter Outside Temperature Indicator


The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of If equipped
distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) This indicator displays the outside
driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S. There are two trip meters: Trip A models). To see the outside
federal law and Canadian provincial and Trip B. Switch between these temperature, press and release the
regulations to disconnect, reset, or displays and the outside temperature Select/Reset button until the
alter the odometer with the intent to display by pressing the Select/Reset temperature is displayed.
change the number of miles or knob repeatedly.
kilometers indicated. The temperature sensor is in the
Each trip meter works independently, front bumper. The temperature
so you can keep track of two reading can be affected by heat
different distances. reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
To reset a trip meter, display it and surrounding traffic. This can cause
then press and hold the Select/Reset an incorrect temperature reading
knob until the number resets to 0.0. when your speed is under
Both trip meters will reset if the 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
vehicles battery goes dead or is your trip, the sensor is not fully
disconnected. acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

72
Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges

In certain weather conditions, Check Fuel Cap Indicator If the system still detects a loose or
temperature readings near freezing (Odometer/trip meter message) missing fuel cap, the Malfunction
(32F, 0C) could mean that ice is On LX and EX models Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on.
forming on the road surface. If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a Turn the engine off and check or
CHECK FUEL CAP message retighten the fuel cap at least 3 clicks.
On the Touring model, the odometer, appears as text in the odometer/trip The MIL goes out after 3 days of

Instruments and Controls


trip meter, and the outside meter display after you start the normal driving once the cap is
temperature indicator are displayed engine. Turn the engine off and tightened or replaced. If it does not
in the multi-information display. See confirm the fuel cap is installed. If it go out, have your dealer inspect the
page 77 for more information. is, loosen the cap, then retighten it at vehicle. For more information, see
least 3 clicks. When you restart the page 372 .
engine, the message appears again.
To clear the message, press and hold
the select/reset button until the
message is replaced in the
odometer/trip meter display.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

73
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

On Touring model only Normal Display Messages


The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.

There are four types of messages;


normal display messages, engine oil When you unlock and open the which remote transmitter you use,
life and maintenance messages, drivers door with the key, the and the drivers seat moves to the
system messages, and PAX system display shows Welcome DRIVER 1 position stored in that transmitter.
warning messages. or Welcome DRIVER 2 depending
on which remote transmitter was When you turn the ignition switch to
You can also customize some vehicle used last. (The drivers ID is LOCK (0) and remove the key from
control settings to your liking with detected by the transmitter.) the ignition switch, the display
the multi-information display and the shows Goodbye.
two buttons on the steering wheel If you use the remote transmitter to
(see page 89 ). unlock the drivers door, the display
shows Welcome DRIVER 1 or
Welcome DRIVER 2 depending on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

74
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

If you press the INFO button when


AVERAGE SPEED is displayed,
UPPER SEGMENT INFO BUTTON the display changes to TIRE
PRESSURE using both segments.
This display is a part of tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS). See

Instruments and Controls


page 303 for more information.

Pressing the INFO button again


brings the display back to the initial
display of the trip computer INST.
MPG.
LOWER SEGMENT SEL RESET BUTTON

The multi-information display In normal display mode, the upper


consists of an upper segment and a display is blank when you turn the
lower segment. Each segment can ignition switch to ON (II). Then each
display two lines of messages. time you press the INFO button, the
trip computer changes from INST.
In normal display mode, the upper MPG to RANGE to ELAPSED
segment displays trip computer and TIME to AVERAGE SPEED and
tire pressures, and the lower then to AVERAGE FUEL A or
segment displays the compass, AVERAGE FUEL B as shown on
odometer, trip meter, outside the next page.
temperature, and engine oil life.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

75
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Messages in the trip computer


include:

INST. MPG: Your vehicles


current fuel mileage.
RANGE: The estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from
the fuel economy you received
over the last several miles, so it
will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
ELAPSED TIME: The time
traveled since you last reset the
trip computer.
AVERAGE SPEED: The average
speed you are traveling.
AVERAGE FUEL A/AVERAGE
FUEL B: Your vehicles average
fuel economy since you last reset
the trip computer.
To reset the values in the trip
computer, press the Select/Reset
button, and hold it for about 1
second.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

76
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


The initial display in the lower Trip Meter AVERAGE FUEL A or
segment is shown above. Each time While a trip meter is displayed, you AVERAGE FUEL B will be
you press the SEL/RESET button on can change the display between displayed when average fuel
the steering wheel, the display TRIP Aand TRIP B by pressing economy is selected in the upper
changes from Odometer/Trip the Select/Reset knob in the segment depending on which trip
Meter to Outside Temperature/ instrument panel (see page 72 ). To meter (TRIP A or TRIP B) is
Trip Meter to Engine Oil Life, and reset a trip meter, display it, and displayed in the lower segment.
then back to the initial display as press and hold the Select/Reset
shown in the next column. knob until the number reset to 0.0.

In the lower left corner of the display,


a compass indicates which direction
your vehicle is pointed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

77
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Engine Oil Life Maintenance Messages Have your dealer do the indicated
maintenance as soon as you see this
message, and have them reset the
display after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicated


maintenance or do not reset the
display, the message changes to
SERVICE PAST DUE when the
engine oil life becomes 0 percent.

These messages appear on the multi-


ENGINE OIL LIFE information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
This shows the remaining life of the When the engine oil life reaches 15
engine oil. It shows 100% after the percent, the display shows For details on engine oil life and
engine oil is replaced and the display SERVICE DUE SOON and the maintenance messages, refer to page
is reset. The engine oil life is code for the maintenance items to be 317 .
calculated based on engine operating performed.
conditions and accumulated engine Also refer to page 314 for important
revolutions. When the engine oil life reaches 5 maintenance safety precautions.
percent, the display shows
SERVICE DUE NOW along with
the same maintenance items.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

78
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

System Messages Fasten Seat Belt


If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does

Instruments and Controls


this by interrupting the current
message with one or more messages.
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
current message returns. Some SYSTEM MESSAGE
messages stay on until the problem INDICATOR
is corrected.
These messages also trigger the
appropriate indicator(s) on the In addition to the seat belt reminder
instrument panel and cause the indicator in the instrument panel, the
system message indicator to come multi-information display interrupts
on. The system message indicator the current display and shows
does not go off until the problem(s) FASTEN SEAT BELT if you do
are corrected. not fasten your seat belt while
driving. This message remains
The following pages describe each displayed if you ignore it and do not
system message that can be wear your seat belt while the vehicle
displayed. is moving.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

79
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Door and Tailgate Open Release Parking Brake Remove Key


U.S.

Canada

If the tailgate or any door(s) is not If you start driving without releasing If you leave the key in the ignition
closed tightly, the display reminds the parking brake, the multi- switch in the LOCK (0) or
you to close the tailgate or the information display interrupts the ACCESSORY (I) position and open
door(s) before you start driving. current display and shows the drivers door, you will see
This display continues until you RELEASE PARKING BRAKE. REMOVE KEY in the display and
close the door(s) or the tailgate. This message continues, and a hear a reminder beeper.
Pressing the INFO button on the chime sounds, until you release the
steering wheel momentarily change parking brake, or the vehicle speed
the display to the normal display, but slows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8
it will come back after 5 seconds. km/h).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

80
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Brake Fluid Low Check Fuel Cap The CHECK FUEL CAP message
should go off after tightening the
U.S fuel cap, turning the ignition switch
off and on, then driving over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for at least 45 seconds.
Due to different driving conditions, it

Instruments and Controls


may take a few driving trips to make
Canada
the message go off.

If a loose or missing fuel cap was not


the cause of the CHECK FUEL CAP
message coming on, the message
will turn off and the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp will come on. If this
If the brake fluid level is at or below If the fuel fill cap is missing or not happens, have your vehicle checked
the MIN mark on the side of the tightened properly, you will see by your dealer as soon as possible.
brake fluid reservoir in the engine CHECK FUEL CAP. Make sure
compartment, you will see BRAKE the fuel cap is installed and tightened
FLUID LOW. If you see this at least 3 clicks.
message, have the brake system
checked by your dealer (see page
373 ).

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

81
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Fuel Low Washer Fluid Low Passenger Side Airbag Off


U.S.

Canada

If the level of the fuel in the tank If the fluid level in the windshield If the passengers side airbag has
gets low, you will see FUEL LOW washer reservoir gets low, you will automatically shut off, you will see
in the display, and you must refuel see WASHER FLUID LOW in the PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF
soon. The low fuel indicator in the multi-information display. in the multi-information display. See
instrument panel will also come on. page 33 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

82
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check Tire Pressure Warning: Approaching Object The following messages indicate
On U.S. Touring model only various problems in your vehicles
systems.

Instruments and Controls


This message, and the indicator to
If one or more of your vehicle tires the left of the message, is a part of
are low on pressure, you will see a the parking sensor system. If you are
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE approaching too close to an object,
message in the display. See page you will see WARNING
303 for more information on the tire APPROACHING OBJECT in the
pressure monitoring system (TPMS). display and hear a beeper. See page
271 for more information.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

83
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check TPMS System Check VSA System Check Engine Oil Level
On U.S. Touring model only

If there is a problem with the vehicle If the engine oil is very low or has
If there is a problem in the tire stability assist (VSA) system, you lost pressure, you will see CHECK
pressure monitoring system (TPMS), will see CHECK VSA SYSTEM in ENGINE OIL LEVEL in the multi-
you will see CHECK TPMS the multi-information display. If you information display. You will also see
SYSTEM in the multi-information see this message, have the VSA the low oil pressure indicator in the
display. If you see this message, the system checked by your dealer (see instrument panel flashing or staying
TPMS is not monitoring tire page 301 ). on. If you see this message, you
pressures. Have the TPMS checked should take immediate action since
by your dealer as soon as possible serious engine damage is possible.
(see page 303 ). Follow the procedure on page 371 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

84
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check Charging System Check Emission System Check Brake System


U.S.

Instruments and Controls


Canada

If you see CHECK CHARGING If you see CHECK EMISSION If there is a problem with the brake
SYSTEM in the multi-information SYSTEM in the multi-information system, you will see CHECK
display, it means the battery is not display, it means one of the engines BRAKE SYSTEM in the multi-
being charged. See page 371 for emission systems may have a information display. The parking
more information. problem. Have your vehicle checked brake and brake system indicator in
by a dealer (see page 372 ). the instrument panel will also come
on. See page 373 for more
information.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

85
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check Transmission Check ABS System Check Airbag System

If there is a problem with the If there is a problem in the anti-lock If there is a problem with your front
automatic transmission, you will see brake system (ABS), you will see airbags, side airbags, passengers
CHECK TRANSMISSION in the CHECK ABS SYSTEM in the side airbag automatic cutoff system,
multi-information display. Avoid multi-information display. If you see automatic seat belt tensioners, or
rapid acceleration, and have the this message, have your vehicle side curtain airbags, you will see
transmission checked by a dealer as checked by a dealer (see page 300 ). CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM in the
soon as possible. multi-information display. Take your
vehicle to a dealer as soon as
possible (see page 32 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

86
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check Parking Sensor System Check Left/Right Sliding Door Check Power Tailgate
U.S. U.S.

Instruments and Controls


Canada Canada

If there is a problem with the If there is a problem in the power If there is a problem with the power
parking sensor system, the multi- sliding door, the multi-information tailgate, the display shows CHECK
information display shows a display shows CHECK LEFT POWER TAILGATE. See page
CHECK PARKING SENSOR SLIDING DOOR or CHECK 139 for more information.
SYSTEM message. See page RIGHT SLIDING DOOR. See page
271 for more information. 147 for more information.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

87
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Check DRL System PAX Warning Messages

Canadian model only U.S. Touring model only For more information, see page 356 .
If there is a problem with the Your vehicle is equipped with the
Daytime Running Light (DRL) Michelin PAX system. The PAX
System, you will see CHECK DRL system uses the multi-information
SYSTEM in the multi-information display to show you one of three
display. If you see this message, messages while you are driving with
have your vehicle checked by a a flat tire.
dealer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

88
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Customized Settings
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for DRIVER 1 and
DRIVER 2 separately. If DRIVER
1 or DRIVER 2 is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.

Instruments and Controls


To enter the customizing mode, the
vehicle must be stopped and the
transmission must be in Park. Press
and hold the INFO button on the
steering wheel for about 3 seconds
while the multi-information display is
in its normal message mode. If you want the settings as they were Use the INFO button on the steering
when the vehicle left the factory, wheel to see the settings, and the
The first customizing menu is: select DEFAULT ALL, as SEL/RESET button to enter your
CHANGE SETTING described on page 90 . selections.
DEFAULT ALL
If you want to change any vehicle You can also use the trip meter
Every time you press the INFO control settings, select CHANGE SELECT/RESET knob in the
button, the display cycles from SETTING, and follow the instrument panel to select and enter
CHANGE SETTING, DEFAULT instructions on page 92 . your selections while the multi-
ALL, EXIT, and then back to information display is in the
CHANGE SETTING as shown in customizing mode. Turn the knob to
the next column. select a setting and press it to enter
your selection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

89
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

DEFAULT ALL

If you want to set the customizable If you want cancel DEFAULT ALL, To set the default settings again,
vehicle control settings to the default press the INFO button, and you will press the SEL/RESET button. The
setting, press the INFO button on see CANCEL. Press the SEL/ display changes as shown above.
the steering wheel until DEFAULT RESET button, and the display goes
ALL is displayed. back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY. Press the SEL/RESET button again
to select DEFAULT ALL.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

90
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


When DEFAULT ALL is completed If DEFAULT ALL is not completed To exit DEFAULT ALL, press the
successfully, you will see the above successfully, you will see the above INFO button until you see EXIT,
display for several seconds, and the display for several seconds, then the then press the SEL/RESET button.
display will return to CUSTOMIZE display goes back to the normal
ENTRY. message mode. Repeat the
procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

91
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Change Setting
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize.

METER SET UP Press SEL/RESET button


POSITION SET UP
LIGHTING SET UP
DOOR/WINDOW SET UP
WIPER SET UP

While the multi-information display


is showing CHANGE SETTING,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display will change to the initial
display of CUSTOMIZE GROUP.
Then, each time you press the INFO
button, the display changes as shown
in the next column.
Press the INFO button until you see
the setup you want to customize, and
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

92
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Meter Setup
There are four custom settings items
in the Meter Setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

Instruments and Controls


DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESET
with REFUEL
COMPASS ZONE SELECTION

While METER SETUP is displayed,


press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then, press the
INFO button repeatedly. Each time
you press the INFO button, the
display changes as shown.

To customize a setting, press the


INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting, and press the SEL/
RESET button. Then, follow the
procedures described on the
following pages.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

93
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Language Selection

While the multi-information display There are three selectable languages, Select the language you want by
is showing METER SETUP, press English, French, and Spanish. Each pressing the INFO button, and press
the SEL/RESET button on the time you press the INFO button, the the SEL/RESET button to enter
steering wheel. The display changes display changes as shown. your selection.
to LANGUAGE SELECTION.
Press the SEL/RESET button again
to enter the language selection mode.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

94
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


When language selection is If you fail to select a language To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION,
successfully completed, the display properly, you will see the above press the INFO button repeatedly
changes to the screen shown above display for several seconds, then the until you see EXIT, and press the
for several seconds, then goes back display goes back to CUSTOMIZE SEL/RESET button. The display
to CUSTOMIZE MENU. MENU. Repeat the setup. goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

All the messages in the multi-


information display will be in the
language you selected.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

95
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Outside Temperature Display


Adjustment
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is always
several degrees below or above the
actual temperature, adjust it as
described on the following pages.

While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The


shows METER SETUP, press the display changes as shown above.
SEL/RESET button on the steering The highlighted number is the
wheel. The display changes to the current adjustment above or below
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the the outside temperature. Press the
INFO button twice, and you will see INFO button repeatedly until the
ADJ. OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY appropriate number appears, and
as shown above. press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

96
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter the desired To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
entered, you will see the above adjustment properly, you will see the DISPLAY, press the INFO button
display for several seconds, and then above display for several seconds, until you see EXIT, and press the
the display changes to EXIT. then the display goes back to SEL/RESET button. The display
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Repeat the goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
adjustment.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

97
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel


To cause Trip meter A and
Average Fuel Economy to reset
every time you refuel your vehicle,
adjust it as described on the
following pages.

While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The


shows METER SETUP of the display changes as shown above.
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the The lower segment changes
SEL/RESET button on the steering between ON and OFF each time
wheel. The display changes to you press the INFO button. Enter
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the your selection by pressing the SEL/
INFO button repeatedly until you see RESET button.
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET
WITH FUEL in the lower segment
as shown above.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

98
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


When your selection is successfully If you fail to enter your selection, To exit TRIP A & AVG. FUEL
entered, you will see the above you will see the above display for WITH REFUEL, press the INFO
display for several seconds, and then several seconds, then the display button until you see EXIT, and
the display goes back to goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. press the SEL/RESET button. The
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Repeat the setup. display goes back to CUSTOMIZE
MENU.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

99
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Compass Zone Selection


On models without Navigation System
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone set into the compass, do the
procedure on the following pages.

While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The


shows METER SETUP, press the display changes as shown above.
SEL/RESET button on the steering The highlighted - - display in the
wheel. The display changes to the lower segment is the zone number; it
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Press the changes from 1 thru 15 each
INFO button repeatedly until you see time you press the INFO button.
COMPASS ZONE SELECTION in
the lower segment as shown above.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

100
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


Find the zone for your area on the
map shown in the next column.

Press the INFO button until you see


your zone number in the lower
segment. Then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your zone
number.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

101
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

When your zone number is If you fail to enter your zone number, To exit COMPASS ZONE
successfully entered, you will see the you will see the above display for SELECTION, press the INFO
above display for several seconds, several seconds, then the display button until you see EXIT, and
then the display changes to goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. press the SEL/RESET button. The
CUSTOMIZE MENU. Repeat the setup. display goes back to CUSTOMIZE
MENU.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

102
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Position Setup Memory Position Setup


When MEMORY POSITION
LINK is set to ON, the drivers
seat moves to the position stored in
memory when you open the drivers
door after unlocking it with the

Instruments and Controls


remote transmitter.

Refer to page 161 to set the seat


position memory. Also refer to page
135 for remote transmitter use.

While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The


shows POSITION SETUP, press display changes as shown above.
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes Each time you press the INFO
to MEMORY POSITION LINK as button, the display changes between
shown above. MEMORY POSITION LINK ON
and MEMORY POSITION LINK
OFF.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

103
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Select ON or OFF by pressing If you fail to enter your selection, To exit MEMORY POSITION
the INFO button, and enter your you will see the above display for LINK, press the INFO button until
selection by pressing the SEL/ several seconds, and the display goes you see EXIT, then press the SEL/
RESET button. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. RESET button.
Repeat the setup.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, then the display goes back
to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

104
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time


There are two custom settings in the
Lighting Setup:

INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME

Instruments and Controls


HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While the LIGHTING SETUP is


displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel. The
display changes between
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME and HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER. The interior lights fade out when you Press the SEL/RESET button. The
close all doors and the tailgate. You display changes as shown above.
can change the time that the interior
lights fade out. Each time you press the INFO
button, the highlighted number
While the multi-information display changes from 15 sec, to 30 sec,
shows LIGHTING SETUP, press and then to 60 sec.
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes
to INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME as shown above.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

105
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the INFO button repeatedly If you fail to enter your selection, To exit INTERIOR LIGHT
until the desired time appears, then you will see the above display for DIMMING TIME, press the INFO
press the SEL/RESET button to several seconds, and the display goes button until you see EXIT, then
enter your selection. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. press the SEL/RESET button.
Repeat the setup.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

106
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Instruments and Controls


While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button. The Press the INFO button repeatedly
shows LIGHTING SETUP, press display changes as shown above. until the desired time appears, then
the SEL/RESET button on the press the SEL/RESET button to
steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO enter your selection.
INFO button to display button, the highlighted number
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER changes from 0 sec, to 15 sec, to When your selection is entered, you
as shown above. 30 sec, and then to 60 sec. will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

107
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

The headlights, parking lights,


taillights, and license plate light turn
off after the selected time when you
remove the key from the ignition
switch and close the drivers door.

If you fail to enter your selection, To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF


you will see the above display for TIMER, press the INFO button
several seconds, and the display goes until you see EXIT, then press the
back CUSTOMIZE MENU. Repeat SEL/RESET button.
the setup.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

108
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Door and Window Setup


There are four custom settings in
the Door and Window Setup:

AUTO DOOR LOCK


AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

Instruments and Controls


KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While the multi-information display


shows DOOR, WINDOW SETUP,
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Each time you press
the INFO button, the display
changes as shown in the next
column.

To customize a setting, press the


INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting you want to customize,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Then follow the procedures
described on the following pages.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

109
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Auto Door Lock

To customize the auto door locking Press the SEL/RESET button again, There are three possible settings:
feature, do this: then press the INFO button. Each
time you press the INFO button, the OFF: The auto door lock is
While the multi-information display display changes from OFF, to deactivated all the time.
shows DOORWINDOW SETUP, VEHICLE SPEED, to SHIFT
press the SEL/RESET button on the FROM P, and then to EXIT as SHIFT FROM P: The doors lock
steering wheel. The display changes shown above. whenever you move the shift lever
to AUTO DOOR LOCK as shown out of P.
above.
VEHICLE SPEED: The doors lock
when the vehicle speed reaches 10
mph (16 km/h).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

110
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


Press the INFO button repeatedly If you fail to enter your selection, To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK,
until the desired condition appears, you will see the above display for press the INFO button until you see
then press the SEL/RESET button several seconds, and the display goes EXIT, then press the SEL/RESET
to enter your selection. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. button.
Repeat the setup.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

111
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Auto Door Unlock

To customize the auto door


unlocking feature, do this:

While the multi-information display


shows DOORWINDOW SETUP,
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the
INFO button once. The display
changes to AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK as shown above.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

112
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the SEL/RESET button again


to enter Auto Door Unlock, then
press the INFO button. Each time
you press the INFO button, the
display changes from OFF, to
DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to P,

Instruments and Controls


to ALL DOORS with SHIFT to P,
to DRIVER DOOR with IG OFF,
and then to EXIT as shown on the
previous page.

OFF: The auto door unlock is


deactivated all the time.
DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to P:
The drivers door unlocks when Press the INFO button repeatedly If you fail to enter your selection,
you move the shift lever to P. until the desired condition appears, you will see the above display for
ALL DOORS with SHIFT to P: All and press the SEL/RESET button to several seconds, and the display goes
doors unlock when you move the enter your selection. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
shift lever to P. Repeat the setup.
DRIVER DOOR with IG OFF: The When your selection is entered, you
drivers door unlocks when you will see the above display for several To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK seconds, and then the display goes press the INFO button until you see
(0). back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. EXIT, then press the SEL/RESET
ALL DOORS with IG OFF: All button.
doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0). CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

113
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment


When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 133 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.

While the multi-information display Press SEL/RESET button, then


shows DOORWINDOW SETUP, press the INFO button.
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO
INFO button repeatedly until you see button, the display changes to ON,
KEYLESS LOCK to OFF, then to EXIT.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT as shown
above. Select ON or OFF by pressing
the INFO button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

114
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


When your selection is entered, you If you fail to enter your selection, To exit KEYLESS LOCK
will see the above display for several you will see the above display for ACKNOWLEDGMENT, press the
seconds, and then the display several seconds, and the display goes INFO button until you see EXIT,
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. then press the SEL/RESET button.
Repeat the setup.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

115
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Security Relock Timer


If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock time


from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

While the multi-information display Press the SEL/RESET button, then


shows DOORWINDOW SETUP, press the INFO button.
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the Each time you press the INFO
INFO button repeatedly until you see button, the time changes from 30
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER as sec, to 60 sec, and then to 90 sec.
shown above.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

116
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


Select the desired relock time by If you fail to enter your selection, To exit SECURITY RELOCK
pressing the INFO button, and enter you will see the above display for TIMER, press the INFO button
your selection by pressing the SEL/ several seconds, and the display goes until you see EXIT, then press the
RESET button. back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. SEL/RESET button.
Repeat the setup.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

117
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Wiper Setup Front Wiper Action


When WIPER SETUP is shown on
the multi-information display, the
action of the windshield wipers can
be changed. To do this, refer to the
following procedure.

With WIPER SETUP shown on the Each time you press the INFO
multi-information display, press the button, the display changes from
SEL/RESET button on the steering WITH VEH SPD, to
wheel. The display changes to INTERMITTENT, and then to
FRONT WIPER ACTION as EXIT.
shown above.
Press the INFO button to select
Press the SEL/RESET button, then WITH VEH SPD or
press the INFO button. INTERMITTENT, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

118
Main Menu Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls


If you set the front wiper action to seconds, and then the display goes To exit FRONT WIPER ACTION,
WITH VEH SPD, the front wipers back to CUSTOMIZE MENU. press the INFO button until you see
run intermittently and the wiper EXIT, then press the SEL/RESET
interval is varied automatically If you fail to enter your selection, button.
according to the vehicles speed you will see the above display for
when the wiper switch is in the several seconds, and the display goes
INTposition. If you set it to back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
INTERMITTENT, the wipers run Repeat the setup.
at regular intervals.

When your selection is entered, you


will see the above display for several
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

119
Main Menu Table of Contents

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

DRIVERS PEDAL HEADLIGHTS/ CRUISE HAZARD WARNING CLOCK


ADJUSTMENT SWITCH TURN SIGNALS CONTROL BUTTON (P.227)
(P.169) (P.122) (P.264) (P.126)

POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
(P.142)
PASSENGER
MOONROOF AIRBAG OFF
(P.166) INDICATOR
(P.33)
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH (P.139) / REAR WINDOW
VSA OFF SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.302) (P.126)
PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH
(P.271)
AUDIO SYSTEM/
VSA OFF REAR
SWITCH ENTERTAINMENT
(P.302) SYSTEM
(P.199, 230)
STEERING WHEEL HORN
AUDIO CONTROLS LIGHT CONTROL
(P.228) SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL MULTI-INFORMATION WINDSHIELD
ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY SWITCHES WIPERS/WASHERS (P.183)
(P.127) (P.75) (P.121)

: To use the horn, press the pad around the H logo.


Inf
ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

120
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers

MIST: The wipers run at high speed Windshield Washer: Pull the wiper
until you release the lever. control lever toward you and
hold it. The washers spray
OFF: The wipers are not activated. until you release the lever.
The wipers run at low speed,
INT The length of the wipe then complete one more

Instruments and Controls


interval is varied sweep after you release the
automatically according to lever.
the vehicles speed. Vary
the delay by turning the On Touring model
INT TIME ring. You can customize some windshield
wiper settings. See page 118 for
If you turn it to the shortest more information.
1. MIST delay, the wipers will
2. OFF change to low speed
3. INT Intermittent operation when the vehicle
4. LO Low speed speed exceeds 12 mph
5. HI High speed (20 km/h).
6. Windshield Washers
LO The wipers run at low speed.
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position. HI The wipers run at high speed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

121
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal, Headlights

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.

Headlights On Rotating the


switch on the left lever to the
position turns on the parking
lights, taillights, instrument panel
lights, side-marker lights, and rear
license plate lights.
1. Rotate the switch clockwise to 1. Turn signal
turn the rear window wiper ON. 2. Off Turning the switch to the
2. Hold past ON to turn the window 3. Parking and indicator lights position turns on the headlights. If
wiper on and the window washer 4. AUTO (Touring model only) you leave the lights on with the
on. 5. Headlights on ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
3. OFF 6. High beams or LOCK (0), you will hear a
4. Rotate the switch 7. Flash high beams reminder chime when you open the
counterclockwise to spray the 8. Fog lights off (Touring model drivers door.
window washer without activating only)
the wiper. 9. Fog lights on (Touring model
only)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

122
Main Menu Table of Contents

Headlights

When the light switch is in the You can use the fog lights only when The lights turn off automatically
or position, the the headlights are on low beam. when you turn the ignition switch to
lights on indicator comes on as a LOCK (0). To turn them on again,
reminder. This indicator stays on if On Touring model either turn the ignition switch to ON
you leave the light switch on and AUTO The automatic lighting (II), or turn the light switch to .
turn the ignition switch to the feature turns on the headlights, all

Instruments and Controls


ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) other exterior lights, and the Even with the automatic lighting
position. instrument panel lights when it feature turned on, we recommend
senses low ambient light. that you turn on the lights manually
High Beams To switch from low when driving at night or in a dense
beams to high beams, push the left To turn on the automatic lighting, fog, or when you enter dark areas
lever forward until you hear a click. turn the light switch to AUTO at any such as long tunnels or parking
The blue high beam indicator will time. The lights will come on structures.
come on (see page 69 ). Pull it back automatically when the outside light
to return to low beams. To flash the level becomes low (at dusk, for Do not leave the light switch in
high beams, pull the lever back example). The lights on indicator AUTO if you will not be driving the
lightly, then release it. The high comes on as a reminder. The lights vehicle for an extended period (a
beams will stay on as long as you and indicator turn off automatically week or more). You should also turn
hold the lever back. when the system senses high off the lights if you plan to leave the
ambient light. engine idling or the engine off for a
Fog Lights long time.
Touring model only
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

123
Main Menu Table of Contents

Headlights

Automatic Lighting Off Feature The lights turn on again when you
On EX and Touring models only unlock or open the drivers door.
This turns off the headlights, If you unlock the door, but do not
parking lights, taillights, side marker open it within 15 seconds, the lights
lights, license plate lights, and go off. With the drivers door open,
instrument panel lights within 15 you will hear a lights-on reminder
seconds of removing the key from chime.
the ignition switch and closing the

drivers door. On the Touring model, this time is
changeable. See page 107 for how to
This feature activates if you leave select and set the time.
the headlight switch in the
or position, remove the key,
The automatic lighting feature is then open and close the drivers door.
controlled by a sensor located on top If you remove the key from the
of the dashboard. Do not cover this ignition switch with the headlight
sensor or spill liquids on it. switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights turn off after
10 minutes.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

124
Main Menu Table of Contents

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness


(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn

Instruments and Controls


the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
switch off, even if you set the
parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal SELECT/RESET KNOB Touring model shown


operation when you turn them on
with the switch. The knob on the instrument panel The level of brightness is shown on
controls the brightness of the instru- the multi-information display on the
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to Touring model or in the odometer/
adjust the brightness. trip meter display on LX and EX
models while you adjust it. It goes
out 5 seconds after you finish
adjusting.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

125
Main Menu Table of Contents

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

LX model EX and Touring models

Push the red button between the The rear window defogger will clear Make sure the rear window is clear
center air vents to turn on the hazard fog, frost, and thin ice from the and you have good visibility before
warning lights (four-way flashers). window. Push the defogger button to starting to drive.
This causes all four outside turn turn it on and off. The indicator in
signals and both indicators in the the button comes on to show the The defogger wires on the inside of
instrument panel to flash. Use the defogger is on. It shuts off when you the rear window can be accidentally
hazard warning lights if you need to turn off the ignition. You have to damaged. When cleaning the glass,
park in a dangerous area near heavy turn the defogger on again when you always wipe side-to-side.
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled. restart the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

126
Main Menu Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in position.

4. Make sure you have securely


locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up and down.

Instruments and Controls


position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only


when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel so it


points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

127
Main Menu Table of Contents

Keys and Locks

EX and Touring models LX model These keys contain electronic


circuits that are activated by the
KEY MASTER VALET KEY
KEY MASTER VALET KEY
NUMBER KEYS (GRAY) Immobilizer System. They will not
NUMBER KEYS (GRAY) work to start the engine if the
TAG (BLACK) TAG (BLACK)
circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct


sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy


objects on them.

The master key fits all the locks on You should have received a key Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works number tag with your keys. You will If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the door need this key number if you ever immediately with a soft cloth.
locks. You can keep the glove box have to get a lost key replaced. Use
locked when you leave your vehicle only Honda-approved key blanks. On EX and Touring models
and the valet key at a parking facility. The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

128
Main Menu Table of Contents

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an keys coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
start. you insert the key. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any

Instruments and Controls


When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not interference received, including
ON (II), the immobilizer system recognize the coding of your key, interference that may cause undesired
indicator should come on for a few contact your dealer. operation.
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system Do not attempt to alter this system Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the or add other devices to it. Electrical approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make compliance could void the users
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert your vehicle undriveable. authority to operate the equipment.
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again. If you have lost your key and you This device complies with Industry
cannot start the engine, contact your Canada Standard RSS-210.
dealer. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

129
Main Menu Table of Contents

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0) You can insert or START (III) Use this position
remove the key only in this position. only to start the engine. The switch
To turn the key, the shift lever must returns to ON (II) when you let go of
be in Park, and you must push the the key.
key in slightly.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
If the front wheels are turned, the you leave the key in the ignition
anti-theft lock may make it difficult switch in the LOCK (0) or
to turn the key. Firmly turn the ACCESSORY (I) position and open
steering wheel to the left or right as the drivers door. Remove the key to
you turn the key. turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) You can The shift lever must be in Park


The ignition switch has four operate the audio system and the before you can remove the key from
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY accessory power sockets in this the ignition switch.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). position.

ON (II) This is the normal key


position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

130
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

On LX model UNLOCK Press this button once PANIC Press and hold this
to unlock the drivers door. Press it button for about 1 second to attract
UNLOCK LOCK twice to unlock the other doors and attention; the horn will sound and
BUTTON BUTTON the tailgate. Some exterior lights will the exterior lights will flash for about
flash twice each time you press the 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
button. If you do not open any door press any other button on the remote

Instruments and Controls


or the tailgate within 30 seconds, transmitter or turn the ignition
they will automatically relock. switch to ON (II).

When you press the UNLOCK Remote Transmitter Care


button, the front and rear individual Refer to page 135 for how to take
PANIC map lights, depending on their care of your remote transmitter.
BUTTON switch positions, will come on (see
page 183 ). If you do not open any
LOCK Press this button once to door or the tailgate, the lights stay
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some on for about 30 seconds, then go out.
exterior lights will flash. When you If you relock the doors and the
push LOCK button twice within 5 tailgate with the remote transmitter
seconds, you will hear a beep to before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
verify that the doors and the tailgate lights will go off immediately.
are locked. You cannot lock the
doors and the tailgate if any door or
the tailgate is not fully closed or if
the key is in the ignition switch.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

131
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter Battery 4. Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
BATTERY

TAB

SCREW

If it takes several pushes on the 2. Separate the transmitter by prying


button to lock or unlock the doors its middle seam with your
and the tailgate, replace the battery fingernail.
as soon as possible.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
Battery type: CR1616 the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
To replace the battery: cover.

1. Remove the screw at the base of


the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

132
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

On EX and Touring models UNLOCK Press this button once time. The LED will blink once.
to unlock the drivers door. Press it
LOCK twice to unlock the other doors and When you press the UNLOCK
LED BUTTON the tailgate. Some exterior lights will button, the front and rear individual
flash twice each time you press the map lights, depending on their
button. switch positions, will come on (see

Instruments and Controls


UNLOCK
BUTTON page 183 ). If you do not open any
If you do not open any doors or the door or the tailgate, the lights stay
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will on for about 30 seconds, then go out.
automatically relock and the security If you relock the doors and the
system sets. tailgate with the remote transmitter
PANIC before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
BUTTON On the Touring model, you can lights will go off immediately.
change this setting (see page 116 ).
LOCK Press this button once to PANIC Press and hold this
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some If you press the LOCK button and button for about 1 second to attract
exterior lights will flash. When you the PASSENGERS SIDE SLIDING attention; the horn will sound and
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, DOOR button at the same time for the exterior lights will flash for about
you will hear a beep to verify that the about 1 second, the LED in the 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
doors and the tailgate are locked and remote transmitter will blink twice, press any other button on the remote
the security system has set. and all doors and the tailgate will transmitter or turn the ignition
unlock simultaneously when you switch to ON (II).
press the UNLOCK button. To
cancel this feature, press the LOCK
button and the PASSENGERS SIDE
SLIDING DOOR button at the same
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

133
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Opening or Closing the Power Opening or Closing the Power


Sliding Doors Tailgate

DRIVERS
SIDE SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON

TAILGATE
BUTTON

PASSENGERS
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR POWER SLIDING DOOR
BUTTON MAIN SWITCH

You can open or close each sliding If the power sliding door MAIN On Touring model only
door with the remote transmitter switch on the dashboard is in the You can open or close the power
when the doors are unlocked. Push OFF position, you cannot open or tailgate with the remote transmitter
and hold the right button to open or close the sliding doors with the when the doors are unlocked. Press
close the passengers side door, and remote transmitter. and hold the TAILGATE button to
the left button to open or close the open or close the power tailgate.
drivers side door. When the tailgate begins to move,
you will hear a beep, and some front
and rear lights will flash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

134
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized Seat The drivers seat position memory Remote Transmitter Care
Position activation (Driver 1, Driver 2) is Avoid dropping or throwing the
shown on the back of each transmitter.
With Driver 1 With Driver 2 transmitter. Make sure you store
your seat position in the memory Protect the transmitter from
that is activated by the transmitter extreme temperature.

Instruments and Controls


you normally carry.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
You can turn off drivers seat any liquid.
position memory activation with the
remote transmitter. Press and hold If you lose a transmitter, the
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at replacement needs to be
the same time. The LED in the reprogrammed by your dealer.
remote transmitter will blink twice.
Then release the buttons, and press
On Touring model only the UNLOCK button.
Each remote transmitter activates
the drivers seat position memory Most of the customized settings will
system and customized vehicle return to the default settings.
control settings (see page 89 ).
When you open the drivers door To turn it back on, repeat this
after unlocking it with the remote procedure. The LED will come on
transmitter, the drivers seat moves for 1 second to indicate the feature
to the positions stored in memory. has been turned on.
You will hear two beeps when the
movement is completed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

135
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter As required by the FCC:


Battery This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly


approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
authority to operate the equipment.

If it takes several pushes on the To replace the battery, separate the This device complies with Industry
button to lock or unlock the doors halfs by carefully prying on the edge Canada Standard RSS-210.
and the tailgate, replace the battery with a coin. Remove the old battery, Operation is subject to the following two
as soon as possible. and insert a new battery with the conditions: (1) this device may not cause
side facing up. Snap the two halves interference, and (2) this device must
Battery type: CR2025 of the transmitter case back together. accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

136
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

Power Door Locks Lockout Prevention


With the drivers door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
Lock
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the drivers door is
closed. Pushing the front of the

Instruments and Controls


master door lock switch on the open
passengers door will lock all doors
and the tailgate.

MASTER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH

To lock the doors and the tailgate, The lock tab on any door locks and
press the front of the master door unlocks that door.
lock switch on either front door,
press the lock tab on the drivers All doors and the tailgate can be
door, or use the outside lock on the locked from the outside by using the
drivers door. key in the drivers door. To unlock
only the drivers door, insert the key,
Pressing the rear of the master door turn the key, and release it. The
lock switch will unlock all doors and remaining doors and the tailgate
the tailgate. unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

137
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks On EX and Touring models Tailgate


With the childproof door locks on,
automatic operation with the inside
door handle is disabled.

The childproof door locks are LX and EX models


designed to prevent children seated To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
in the rear from accidentally opening then lift up. To close the tailgate, use
the rear sliding doors. Each door has the inner handle to pull it down, then
a lock lever near the edge. With the press down on the back edge.
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the outside Keep the tailgate closed at all times
regardless of the position of the lock while driving to avoid damaging the
tab. To open the door, pull the lock tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
tab up and use the outside door from getting into the interior. See
handle. Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
56 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

138
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

Power Tailgate Press and hold the tailgate button on


the remote transmitter or the
DASHBOARD SWITCH dashboard switch for about 1 second
to open or close the tailgate. Each
time you press the button on the
remote transmitter or the dashboard

Instruments and Controls


switch, you will hear a beep.

If you push the same button or


switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
TAILGATE three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
BUTTON moving, reverse direction, and stop TAILGATE SWITCH
at the fully opened or closed position.
On Touring model only The tailgate can also be closed by
The tailgate can be opened and pressing the button on the tailgate. If
closed with the remote transmitter you press the button again while the
or the switch on the dashboard when tailgate is closing, you will hear three
both front doors are unlocked. beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.

To open or close the tailgate


manually, see page 138 .

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

139
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

Auto-Reverse Also check that passengers, When the tailgate or the roof is
The power tailgate has an auto- especially children, do not have their covered with snow or ice.
reverse feature. If it meets hands on the edge of the tailgate or
resistance while opening or closing, on the tailgate still. The auto reverse Do not install any accessories on the
it will beep three times and reverse feature stops working when the tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
direction. However, the tailgate may tailgate is about to latch so the motor to function properly. If there is snow
not reverse immediately. Always can pull the tailgate shut. or ice on the tailgate, make sure to
make sure passengers and objects remove it before you operate the
are clear of the tailgate before If your vehicles battery is tailgate.
opening or closing it. disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully If you pull the tailgate release handle
open, the power tailgate needs to be while the tailgate is opening or
reset. After connecting the battery closing, it will stop moving. You need
Closing a power tailgate while or installing the fuse, close the to open or close it the rest of the way
anyone is in the path of the tailgate fully by hand. manually.
tailgate can cause serious
injury. The power tailgate may not open or The tailgate has sensors on both
close under the these conditions: sides. Be careful not to damage them.
Make sure everyone is clear If the sensors are damaged, the
before closing the power The vehicle is parked on a steep power tailgate does not function
tailgate. hill. properly.

When the vehicle is swayed in a


strong wind.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

140
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

If you try to drive off with the Unlocking the Tailgate


tailgate not closed completely, a
beeper sounds and a DOOR &
TAILGATE OPEN message is
shown on the multi-information
display.

Instruments and Controls


Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
56 .

If there is a problem in the power On Touring model only Push the release lever to the right as
tailgate system, you will see a If the power door lock system cannot shown.
CHECK POWER TAILGATE unlock the tailgate, unlock it
message on the multi-information manually. If you need to unlock the tailgate
display. Have the system checked by manually, it means there is a
your dealer. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to problem with the tailgate. Have the
remove the cover on the back of the vehicle checked by your dealer.
With this message shown in the tailgate.
multi-information display, you can
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

141
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks, Sliding Doors

Opening and Closing Manual Power Sliding Doors


Sliding Doors On EX and Touring models
LX model The doors are electrically powered
To open, pull the inside or outside and can be operated with the remote
door handle, and slide the door back. transmitter, the door handles, or the
It will latch in the fully open position. dashboard switches. To operate the
When opening from the inside, the doors:
childproof door lock must be The shift lever must be in Park or
unlocked. Neutral. To operate the doors with
the shift lever in Neutral, the
To close, pull either handle, and slide ignition switch must be in the ON
the door closed. Make sure the door (II) position with the brake pedal
is closed and latched securely before pressed or the parking brake
On LX and EX models driving, and all passengers are clear applied.
If you cannot open the tailgate, of the sliding doors before closing
remove the cover on the back of the them. The MAIN switch must be in the
tailgate (see page 141 ). Use the key ON position.
to unlock the tailgate as shown, then When opening a sliding door, it stops
pull the outer handle to open the about halfway if the window is open The doors must be unlocked.
tailgate. more than 3 in (8 cm). If the vehicle
is facing downhill, the sliding door
will slam shut when you release the
door handle. Always close the
window fully before opening the
sliding door.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

142
Main Menu Table of Contents

Sliding Doors

When the shift lever is in Park: Door Handles Dashboard Switches


If you shift out of Park while a door To open the door with the inside
is closing, you will hear a beep until door handle, pull the handle POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
the door closes. backward. Push it forward to close
the door. If you pull backward or
If you shift out of Park while a door push forward on the door handle

Instruments and Controls


is opening, you will hear a while a door is opening or closing,
continuous tone and the door will the door stops moving. Pull
stop moving. Stop the vehicle and backward or push forward to open or
close the door. close the door fully.

When the shift lever is in Neutral and To open or close the door with the POWER SLIDING
the ignition switch is in the ON position: outside door handle, pull the door DOOR SWITCHES
If you shift out of Neutral or release handle. If you pull the door handle
the brake pedal or the parking brake while a door is opening or closing, The dashboard switches to the left
while a door is closing, you will hear the door stops moving. If you pull the of the steering column allow you to
a beep until the door closes. door handle again, the door will open open or close the power sliding doors.
fully.
If you shift out of Neutral or release The MAIN switch on the dashboard
the brake pedal or the parking brake controls power to the sliding doors.
while a door is opening, you will hear
a continuous tone and the door will
stop moving. Stop the vehicle and
close the door.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

143
Main Menu Table of Contents

Sliding Doors

To open a power sliding door, push Remote Transmitter Auto-Reverse


and release the bottom of the Each power sliding door has an auto-
appropriate switch. If you forget to LED reverse feature. If a door meets
unlock the door, you will hear three resistance while closing, it will beep
beeps. Unlock the door and try again. DRIVERS three times and reverse direction.
SIDE
SLIDING However, the door may not reverse
To close a sliding door, push and DOOR immediately and may cause some
release the top of the switch. BUTTON bruising or discomfort. Always make
sure passengers and objects are
To stop a door, push either the top or PASSENGERS clear of the doors before closing
SIDE
bottom of the switch. The door will SLIDING them.
stop and you will hear three beeps. DOOR
Push the switch again to resume BUTTON If a rear window is open more than
movement. 3 in (8 cm), the power sliding door is
To open and close a power sliding designed to stop about halfway to
When the MAIN switch is in the door, press and hold the appropriate avoid accidents. If this happens,
OFF position, you have to operate button for at least 1 second. If you close the door with the door handles,
the doors manually. forget to unlock the door, you will the dashboard switch, or the remote
hear three beeps. Unlock the door, transmitter. Close the window and
and try again. open the sliding door. Make sure the
To stop movement, push the window is fully closed before you
appropriate door button; you will operate the power sliding door.
hear three beeps. Push and hold the
same button again for at least 1
second and the door will reverse
direction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

144
Main Menu Table of Contents

Sliding Doors

Manually Opening/Closing the If there is an obstacle in the door sill, Do not put any item in the door
Power Sliding Door the power sliding door may not open pocket sticks out from the pocket. It
You can manually open or close the or close properly. When removing can prevent the doors from opening
sliding doors. The MAIN switch the obstacle from the door sill, make or closing properly, and damage the
must be in the OFF position. To sure to turn off the main switch on vehicle body.
open a door, pull the inside or the dashboard.

Instruments and Controls


outside door handle, and slide the
door back. It will latch in the fully When replacing a flat tire, make sure
open position. To close, pull either to turn off the power sliding door Closing a sliding door while any
handle and slide the door forward. main switch on the dashboard. part of a passenger is in the
When the door is almost closed, the doors path can cause serious
auto-closer will pull the door shut. On all models injury.
Do not allow anyone to step on the
Important Sliding Door lower arm of the sliding door while Make sure all passengers are
Precautions the door is open. This could damage clear of the doorway before
On EX and Touring models the sliding door mechanism. closing a sliding door.
Before operating the sliding doors,
check that passengers, especially When you drive with children in your
children, do not have their hands on vehicle, use the childproof door
the edge of the sliding door or on the locks (see page 138 ). This will
door pillar. The auto-reverse motor prevent children from opening the
stops working when the door is doors accidentally.
about to latch so the auto-closer can
pull the door shut.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

145
Main Menu Table of Contents

Sliding Doors

Refueling Parking on a Hill If you leave the vehicle on a steep


When you release the fuel fill door, When parking facing downhill, make downhill with a power sliding door
the drivers side sliding door sure the doors are latched in the half open and the engine off, the
automatically locks so it cannot open fully open position, and then hold the magnetic lock will turn off after 30
and interfere with the fuel door. If a door open for your passengers. Do minutes and the sliding door will
passenger attempts to unlock the not pull the inside or outside door automatically open or close. In this
door by cycling the lock knob several handle, or the door will slam shut. case you will hear a continuous tone.
times, the door can be opened.
On EX and Touring models If your vehicle is facing a downhill,
If a passenger needs to get out while Make sure the main switch on the do not turn the main switch to OFF
you are refueling, instruct that dashboard is in the ON position. while the door is opening because
person to exit on the passengers the door may slam shut.
side. When parking facing downhill on a
steep grade, the power sliding doors
When you close the fuel fill door, the may not open or close as they do
drivers side sliding door unlocks if it normally.
was unlocked when you opened the
fuel fill door.

On EX and Touring models


If you open the fuel fill door while
the drivers side sliding door is
opening, the sliding door stops. If
this happens, the door must be
operated manually.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

146
Main Menu Table of Contents

Sliding Doors

Pinch Sensor Power Sliding Door Problems On Touring model


If there is a problem in the power
PINCH SENSOR POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR sliding door system, you will see a
CHECK LEFT SLIDING DOOR
message or CHECK RIGHT
SLIDING DOOR message in the

Instruments and Controls


multi-information display (see page
87 ). If this message stays on, turn
the MAIN switch to OFF, and have
the system inspected by your dealer.

If the battery is disconnected or goes


U.S. indicator shown dead, close the sliding door
completely by hand. If it still does
On EX and Touring models On EX model not operate properly after the
Each sliding door has a pinch sensor If the power sliding door indicator battery is reconnected, have your
on the front edge. Do not damage comes on and stays on, there is a vehicle checked by a dealer.
this sensor, or the power sliding door problem in the system. Turn the
may not operate properly. MAIN switch to OFF, and have the
system inspected by a dealer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

147
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Passenger Seating
Convertible Second Row Bucket
Seats
There are bucket seats with
armrests for two front passengers,
bucket seats with armrests for two
passengers in the second row, and a
bench seat for three passengers in
the third row.

For greater cargo capacity, the seats


in the second row can be removed,
and the bench seat in the third row
can be folded into the floor.

The EX model has a stowable second


row plus-one seat that can be
installed between the second row
bucket seats when needed. The plus-
one seat can also be used as a second
row center console, or stored in the
floor storage area. For more
information, see page 156 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

148
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

The EX and Touring models have a Manual Seat Adjustments To adjust the bucket seats in the
power adjustable drivers seat. The second row, pull up the bar on the
LX model has manual drivers seat front of the seat bottom.
adjustments.
The third row seats do not adjust
The front passengers seat, and the forward and backward.

Instruments and Controls


seats in the second and third rows
adjust manually.

Make all seat adjustments before


you start driving.

See pages 13 15 for important safety


information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

To adjust the seat forward and


backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushions front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

149
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Drivers Seat Manual Height


Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT STRAP

To change the seat-back angle of the The left and right halves of the third
front seat, pull up on the lever on the seat-back can be adjusted separately. On LX model
outside of the seat bottom. To adjust the angle, pull the The height of your drivers seat is
adjustment strap on the outside of adjustable. Pull up the lever on the
To change the seat-back angle of the each seat-back, move the seat-back outside of the seat cushion to raise
bucket seats in the second row, pull to the desired position, and release the seat bottom or push the lever
forward on the lever on the outside the adjustment strap. Let the seat- down to lower the seat cushion.
of the seat-back. back latch in the new position.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

150
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Power Seat Adjustments Raises or lowers the


On EX and Touring models seat.
See pages 13 15 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs. Adjusts the seat-

Instruments and Controls


back angle forward
The controls for the adjustable or backward.
drivers power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving. Moves the seat
forward and
Moving the long horizontal switch backward.
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch. Moves the front of
The short vertical switch adjusts the the seat up or down
seat back angle. and the rear of the
seat up or down.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

151
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Drivers Lumbar Support Armrests Head Restraints


See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with head


restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.

They are most effective when you


adjust them so the back of the
occupants head rests against the
On EX and Touring models An armrest is located on each of the center of the restraint.
To change the lumbar support, move front seats and on each side of the
the lever on the right side of the second row seats. Pivot it down to
seat-back forward or backward. use it. When you remove the bucket
Keep moving the lever forward or seats in the second row, pivot the
backward until you find a suitable armrests up out of the way.
position.
On EX with Leather and Touring models
The angle of the armrest on each
front seat is adjustable. Pivot the
armrest down, and pull it up to the
desired angle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

152
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Third Seat Access

Instruments and Controls


RELEASE
BUTTON

All head restraints adjust for height.


You need both hands to adjust the To get into or out of the third row When the seat on the passengers
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it seat, walk between the second row side is moved to the center, walk
while driving. To raise it, pull upward. seats. through the passengers side to get
To lower the restraint, push the into or out of the third row seat.
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down. On the Touring model, you need to
remove the second row console
before you can make this seat
adjustment.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

153
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Moving the Second Row Bucket


Seat
BUTTONS LOCK
RELEASE
LEVER

PIECE MAT
To get into or out of the third row
seat, pull up the release lever on the The second row bucket seat on the Unlock the seat from the floor by
shoulder of each second row bucket passengers side can be moved to the pulling the lock release lever under
seat. The seat-back will tilt forward center to provide access to the third the seat cushions front edge and
and the whole seat will slide forward. row seat. lifting the rear of the seat.

Remove the piece mat and the floor Slide the seat toward the center of
cover from under the passengers the vehicle.
side bucket seat. To remove the Push the back of the seat down over
piece mat, unfasten the two buttons the floor hooks. Make sure the seat
on the rear edge. is securely locked in place.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

154
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Make sure the seat is securely Removing the Bucket Seats in the
locked in place before driving. A seat Second Row
TABS PIECE MAT that is not locked in place could fly
around and cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.

Instruments and Controls


Reverse this procedure to move the
seat back to the outside.

When the passengers side bucket


seat is in the outside position, and
the plus-one seat or the second row
SLIT COVER
console is not used, install the floor
mat and the piece mat over the LOCK RELEASE LEVER
Install the floor covers over the outer center floor anchors between the
floor anchor and install the piece mat bucket seats. Make sure to fasten Both seats can be removed to give
over the floor cover. Insert the tabs the buttons on the mat to the floor. more cargo capacity.
on the piece mat into the slit on the
floor. Fasten the buttons on the mat To remove a seat:
to the floor. Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and fold the seat-
back forward.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever under
the seat cushions front edge and
lifting the rear of the seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

155
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

To reinstall the seat, hook the front Installing the Stowable Second
of the seat to the floor, then push the Row Plus-One Seat
back into the locks. Make sure both
the front and the back of the seat are
securely latched before driving.

Unhook the front of the seat from On EX model only


the floor by pulling it back slightly, You can install the stowable plus-one
then pivoting it upward. seat between the second row bucket
seats.
Always remove an unsecured seat
from the vehicle before driving. A
seat that is not locked in place could
be thrown about and cause injury in
a sudden stop or crash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

156
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Install the seat cushion on the seat


bottom plate. To install the cushion,
hook the front of the cushion first,
then push down the rear until the
cushion is securely positioned.

Instruments and Controls


To use the plus-one seat as a center
console, remove its seat cushion by
pulling up the seat cushion strap.
Then pivot the seat-back forward
until it is flat. Store the seat cushion
in the floor storage area.

ANGLE ADJUSTMENT STRAP

To install the stowable plus-one seat, To remove the seat, lower the head
pull the leg folding lever to unfold restraint all the way down. Remove
the leg, hook the front of the seat to the seat cushion by pulling the strap
the floor, then push down the back on the seat cushion, and fold the
until it locks. Make sure both the seat-back forward.
front and back of the seat are
securely latched. Pull up the seat-
back, and adjust the seat-back angle
to the desired position while pulling
the seat-back angle adjustment strap
on the outside of the seat bottom. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

157
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Always remove an unsecured seat Folding the One-Motion Third


from the vehicle before driving. A Row Magic Seat
seat that is not locked in place could To create more cargo space, you can
LEG FOLDING LEVER be thrown about and cause injury in fold the one-motion third row Magic
a sudden stop or crash. Seat into the floor recess.

The stowable plus-one seat assembly 1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
can be stored in the floor storage anchor center seat belt, and let the
area between the front seats and the belt retract all the way into the
second row seats. To do this, remove ceiling. Place the latch plate and
the Lazy Susan from the floor anchor latch into their holding
storage area. slots.

LOCK RELEASE LEVER 2. Lower the head restraints fully.

Unlock the seat from the floor by


pulling the lock release lever and the
leg folding lever on the bottom of the
seat-back, and lift the rear of the seat.
Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

158
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

HANDLE

Instruments and Controls


3. Pull the handle on each seat-back To return the seat to the upright 2. Pull the seat-back upright with the
to unlock the front seat legs. position: strap. Make sure the seat is
securely locked.
4. Pivot the seat into the cargo area 1. Pull the seat out of the recess by
floor recess. pulling on the handle. Pivot the
seat forward all the way. The front
Make sure all items in the cargo area seat legs will automatically latch.
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See Carrying Cargo
on page 286 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

159
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seat Heaters

the bottom of the switch. This will Follow these precautions when using
keep the seat warm. the seat heaters:

In HI, the heater turns off when the Use the HI setting only to heat the
seat gets warm, and turns back on seats quickly, because it draws
after the seats temperature drops. large amounts of current from the
battery.
In LO, the heater does not cycle with
temperature change. If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
On EX with Leather and Touring models
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use them. The
seat heater switches are located on
the dashboard above the center
pocket. Push the top of the switch,
HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

160
Main Menu Table of Contents

Drivers Seat Position Memory System

On Touring model only Storing a Drivers Seat Position in MEMO BUTTON


Your vehicle has a memory feature Memory
for the drivers seat position. Store a drivers seat position only
when the vehicle is parked.
Two seat positions can be stored in
separate memories. You select a 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Instruments and Controls


memorized position by pushing the You cannot add a new seat
appropriate button or appropriate position in memory unless the
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or ignition switch is in the ON (II)
Driver 2). position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position. MEMORY BUTTONS

2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press and release the MEMO


position (see page 151 ). button on the control panel. You
will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator in the
memory button will come on. The
current drivers seat position is
now stored.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

161
Main Menu Table of Contents

Drivers Seat Position Memory System

Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position The system will move the drivers
pressing the MEMO button will seat to the memorized position. The
cancel the storing procedure. indicator in the selected memory
button will flash during movement.
Not pressing a memory button When the adjustment is complete,
within 5 seconds. you will hear two beeps, and the
indicator will stay on.
Readjusting the seat position. To stop the systems automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Each memory button stores only one Press any button on the control
seat position. Storing a new position panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
erases the previous position stored in
that buttons memory. If you want to MEMORY BUTTONS Push any of the adjustment
add a new position while retaining switches for the seat.
the current one, use the other To select a memorized position, do
memory button. this: Shift out of Park.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in If desired, you can use the
Park. Press on the brake pedal. adjustment switches to change the
seat position after it is in its
2. Press the desired memory button memorized position. If you change
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then the memorized position, the
release the button. indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this seat position for
later use, you must store it in the
drivers seat position memory.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

162
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Windows

DRIVERS WINDOW MAIN SWITCH The windows will operate for up to If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
SWITCH 10 minutes after you turn off the passenger windows cannot be raised
ignition switch. Opening either front or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
door cancels this function. off when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the

Instruments and Controls


windows unintentionally.
Closing a power window on
someones hands or fingers can AUTO REVERSE If the drivers
cause serious injury. window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
Make sure your passengers are reverse direction and then stop. To
away from the windows before close the window, remove the
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) closing them. obstacle, then use the window switch
to raise or lower any window. To again.
open the window, push the switch
down to the first detent and hold it. AUTO To open/close the drivers Auto reverse stops sensing when the
Release the switch when you want window, push the window switch window is almost closed. You should
the window to stop. Pull back on the firmly down or up to the second always check that all passengers and
switch and hold it to close the detent, and release it. The window objects are away from the window
window. will automatically go up or down all before closing it.
the way. To stop the window, pull/
push on the window switch briefly.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

163
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Windows

If your vehicles battery is Opening the Windows with the 2. Press the UNLOCK button a
disconnected or goes dead, or the Remote Transmitter second time, and hold it. The
drivers window fuse is removed, the passengers doors unlock, and all
AUTO REVERSE function will be four windows start to open. To
disabled. The power window system stop the windows, release the
needs to be reset after reconnecting button.
the battery or installing the fuse.
3. To open the windows further,
1. Start the engine. Push down and press the button again and hold it.
hold the drivers window switch If the windows stop before the
until the window is fully open. desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
2. Pull and hold the drivers window
switch to close the window You cannot close the windows with
completely, then hold the switch the remote transmitter.
for a second or two more. On EX and Touring models
You can open all of the windows
If the power windows do not operate from the outside with the remote
properly after resetting, have your transmitter.
vehicle checked by your dealer.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the drivers door.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

164
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Windows

Opening/Closing the Windows 3. Turn the key clockwise again, and If the windows stop before the
with the Key hold it. All four windows start to desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
open. To stop the windows,
release the key.

4. To open the windows further, turn

Instruments and Controls


and hold the key again (within
15 seconds).
Close To close:
Open 1. Insert the key in the drivers door
lock.

2. Turn the key counterclockwise,


then release it.
On EX and Touring models
You can open and close the windows 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
with the key in the drivers door lock. again, and hold it. All four
windows start to close. To stop the
To open: windows, release the key.
1. Insert the key in the drivers door
lock. 4. To close the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within
2. Turn the key clockwise, then 15 seconds).
release it.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

165
Main Menu Table of Contents

Moonroof

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,


press and hold the center button
( ). To close the moonroof, If you try to open the moonroof in
press and hold the top of the switch below-f reezing temperatures, or when
( ). To open the moonroof, it is covered with snow or ice, you can
press and hold the bottom of the damage the moonroof panel or its
switch ( ). motor.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.


You can still open and close the
Opening or closing the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
moonroof on someones hands you turn off the ignition. The key-off
or fingers can cause serious delay cancels as soon as you open
On EX with Leather and Touring models injury. either front door. You must then
The moonroof can be tilted up in the turn the ignition to ON (II) for the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid Make sure all hands and fingers moonroof to operate.
back into the roof. Use the switch are clear of the moonroof
under the left dashboard vent to before opening or closing it.
operate the moonroof. You must
turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
for the moonroof to operate.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

166
Main Menu Table of Contents

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

SELECTOR SWITCH

Instruments and Controls


Keep the inside and outside mirrors On Touring model
clean and adjusted for best visibility. The inside mirror can automatically 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before darken to reduce glare. To turn on
you start driving. this feature, press the button on the 2. Move the selector switch to L
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO (drivers side) or R (passengers
On LX and EX models indicator comes on as a reminder. side).
The inside mirror has day and night When it is on, the mirror darkens
positions. The night position reduces when it senses the headlights of a
glare from headlights behind you. vehicle behind you, then returns to
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of normal visibility when the lights are
the mirror to select the day or night gone. Press the button again to turn
position. off this sensing.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

167
Main Menu Table of Contents

Mirrors

Parking Brake
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

3. Push the appropriate edge of the On EX and Touring models To apply the parking brake, push the
adjustment switch to move the The outside mirrors are heated to parking brake pedal down with your
mirror right, left, up, or down. remove fog and frost. With the foot. To release the parking brake,
ignition switch in the ON (II) push on the pedal again. The parking
When you finish, move the position, turn on the heaters by brake indicator on the instrument
selector switch to the center (off) pressing the button. The indicator in panel should go out when the
position. This turns the the button comes on as a reminder. parking brake is fully released with
adjustment switch off to keep your Press the button again to turn the the engine running (see page 63 ).
settings. heaters off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

168
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Brake, Adjustable Drivers Foot Pedals

Adjustable Drivers Foot Pedals To adjust the pedals:

Driving the vehicle with the parking PEDAL POSITION 1. Push and hold the top of the
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
brake applied can damage the rear adjustment switch until pedals are
brakes and axles. closest to you.

Instruments and Controls


2. Adjust your seat and the steering
wheel so you can operate the
controls and steering wheel easily.

3. Push and hold the bottom of the


adjustment switch until pedals are
in the position you can press them
fully and comfortably.
On Touring model only
You can adjust the position of the Do not adjust the pedals with your
brake pedal, and accelerator pedal foot on or under either pedal.
when the shift lever is in the Park
position. Push the top of the
adjustment switch to move the
pedals forward, and the bottom to
move them backward.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

169
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

REAR COAT HOOK BEVERAGE RETRACTABLE BEVERAGE SUN VISOR SUNGLASSES


COMPARTMENT HOLDER CENTER TRAY HOLDER HOLDER WITH
CONVERSATION
MIRROR

VANITY
MIRROR

ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET

UPPER GLOVE
BOX

LOWER
GLOVE BOX
CENTER
POCKET

IN-FLOOR
ACCESSORY STORAGE
POWER
SOCKET
REMOVABLE SECOND BEVERAGE HOLDER
: Touring model only ROW CONSOLE

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

170
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Retractable Center Tray Beverage Holders


Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,

Instruments and Controls


and electrical components in the
interior.

To use the retractable center tray, Sitting on or getting under the tray,
pull up the outside edge of the tray or putting heavy objects on the tray,
until it latches. To store it, pull the may damage or deform it.
lever and lower the tray.
Do not keep items on the tray while
driving. They may fall down or fly
around when you go around corners
or brake hard.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

171
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

To protect the beverage holder, the


TAB bottom tray is designed to break
away if you try to place a heavy
object on it. If this happens, hold the
edge of the bottom tray and pull it up
until you feel a detent.

Be careful not to damage an open


beverage holder when you get into
or out of the vehicle.

The beverage holders for the third


seat passengers are in the armrests
To use the front beverage holder, Each second row seat has a on the rear side panels.
pull the handle. beverage holder on the outside of
the seat cushion. To use the
Additional beverage holders for the beverage holder, push on the tab.
front seat passengers are in the The beverage holder will swing open.
retractable center tray. To close, pivot it up and push it in
until it latches.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

172
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Integrated Sunshades The sunshades are intended for use


only when the windows are fully
HOOK closed. If a window is opened, the
shade can be blown off its hooks. As
the shade automatically retracts, it
could hit and hurt anyone sitting too

Instruments and Controls


close to the window.

TAB
On Touring model
The removable second row console On EX and Touring models
has a beverage holder on the front. Each rear sliding door has an
integrated sunshade. To use a
To use the beverage holder, push on sunshade, hold the tab on the top
the front lid. The lid will swing open. and pull the sunshade all the way up.
To close, lower the lid, and push it Insert the holes on the sunshade into
down until it latches. the hooks on the window frame. To
store the shade, unhook it, and let it
retract all the way down.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

173
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror

Push

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push To open the sunglasses holder, push On EX and Touring models
on the front edge. It will unlatch and on the front edge. Make sure the The sunglasses holder uses a convex
swing down. To close it, push it until holder is closed while you are driving. mirror for its bottom panel. You can
it latches. Make sure the holder is Some larger styles of sunglasses see all the vehicle passengers on this
closed while you are driving. may not fit in the holder. mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder, push it to the first
You may also store small items in detent, and release it.
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

174
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment

Instruments and Controls


SUN VISOR REAR COMPARTMENT LEVER

To use the sun visor, pull it down. Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use To open the compartment, pull the
When using the sun visor for the it. The lights come on only when the lever and lift the lid. To close, lower
side window, remove the support rod parking lights are on. the lid and push it down until it
from the clip, and swing it out. In this latches.
position, the sun visor can be The vanity mirror light will not come
adjusted by moving it on its slider. on if the sun visor is slid outward.

Make sure you put the sun visor


back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

175
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Removable Second Row Console To reinstall the console, hook the


front of it to the floor, then push
down the back until it locks. Make
sure the console is securely locked in
place. A console that is not locked in
place could fly around and cause
injury in a sudden stop or crash.

If you remove the second seat center


console, store it in a safe place
outside the vehicle.
TAB TAB

On Touring model only To remove the console, pull up the


There is a removable console tab at the front edge to unlock the
between the second row bucket rear of the console from the floor.
seats.
Unhook the front of the console
To open the console, push the tab, from the floor by pulling it back
and slide the lid to the rear. slightly, then pivoting it upward.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

176
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

In-Floor Storage Area


HOOK

Instruments and Controls


HANDLE LID HANDLE

There is a large storage area under To keep the lid open, attach the hook To place or remove small items from
the floor between the front seats and to the grab rail on the back of the the storage area, pull off the carpet
the second row bucket seats. front seat-back. in the center of the lid, and pull the
handle to open the small lid.
To place or remove large items from You can adjust the length of the
the storage area, pull off the carpet hook strap. Pull down the upper
near the second seat, and pull the edge of the stopper, and slide it up or
handle to open the large lid. down.

On EX and Touring models, this


handle can be locked with the
master key. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

177
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

You can store items in the floor To prevent items from being thrown
storage area up to 22 lbs (10 kg). Do about the vehicle and possibly
not exceed this weight limit, or you hurting someone in an accident or
may damage the floor storage area. sudden stop, be sure the storage
area lids are securely closed before
The inside of the storage area can driving away.
get very hot. Do not store any items
that should be kept cool, or items
that can be easily damaged, warped,
or deformed by heat.

Dust, sand, etc., can accumulate in


the floor storage area. If you spill
liquid on the floor around the floor
To lock the small lid, open the large storage area, it can get inside the
lid, and turn the lock knob clockwise. storage area, and the moisture can
be trapped inside. Always keep the
inside of the storage area dry and
clean.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

178
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

The Lazy Susan can be damaged if it


is kept in a humid place. Always
STOWABLE SECOND ROW LAZY SUSAN store the Lazy Susan in a dry place
PLUS-ONE SEAT when it is removed.

Instruments and Controls


HANDLE

On EX and Touring models, the floor To remove the Lazy Susan, open the
storage area has a Lazy Susan inside large lid. Attach the hook to the grab
which makes it easier to find items rail on the back of the front seat to
through the small lid. keep the lid open. Hold the two
handles on the edge of the Lazy
The Lazy Susan can be removed. Susan, and pull it out of the storage
When it is removed, a larger item, area. Store the removed Lazy Susan
such as the stowable second row in a safe place outside the vehicle.
plus-one seat, can be stored. Do not place it on the vehicle floor or
seat, or in the cargo area. It can fly
around the interior in a crash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

179
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

An open glove box can cause


serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.

Always keep the glove boxes


closed while driving.

Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by
the bottom of the handle. Close it pressing the button. The lid will
with a firm push. Lock or unlock the swing open. Close it with a firm push.
glove box with the master key.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

180
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Center Pocket
Vehicles without RES Vehicles with RES

Instruments and Controls


Open the center pocket by pulling On vehicles without navigation
the handle. Close it with a firm push. system, there is another pocket
under the heating and cooling
system control panel. Pull the handle
to open it. Close it with a firm push.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

181
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Sockets These sockets are intended to supply AC Power Outlet
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

None of the sockets will power an


automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).

There are three accessory power There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
sockets in your vehicle. Two in the rear compartment on the
accessory power sockets are above drivers side. To use the AC power
the center pocket for the front seat outlet, open the rear compartment
passengers, and another is on the lid and open the outlet cover. Insert
cargo area sidewall on the drivers the plug into the receptacle slightly,
side. turn it 90 clockwise, then push in
the plug all the way.

Always run the engine when you use


the AC Power Outlet.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

182
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

The maximum capacity for this Light Control Switch The individual map lights in the
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100 second and third rows cannot be
watts or less. If you use an appliance LIGHT CONTROL ON DOOR turned on.
SWITCH ACTIVATED
which requires more than 100 watts, POSITION
it automatically stops supplying the The cargo area light can be turned
power. If this happens, turn the on with the switch in the light.

Instruments and Controls


ignition switch off and turn it on
again. When the switch is in the Door
Activated position:
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not The individual map lights in the
designed for electric appliances front come on when any door is
which require high initial peak opened. When the doors are
wattage such as cathode-ray tube OFF closed, each light can be turned on
type televisions, refrigerators, and off by pressing the lenses.
electric pumps, etc. It is also not The light control switch has three
suitable for devices that process positions: OFF, Door Activated, and The individual map lights in the
precise data such as medical ON. second and third rows come on
equipment or measuring instruments. when any door is opened. When
Any appliances that require an When this switch is in the OFF position: the doors are closed, each light
extremely stable power supply such None of the lights come on when a can be turned on and off by
as microcomputer-controlled electric door or the tailgate is opened. pushing on the lens.
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this The individual map lights in the
outlet. front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

183
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights

When the light control switch is in the On EX and Touring models Individual Map Lights
ON position: The lights go out about 30 seconds
All the individual map lights come after all the doors and the tailgate FRONT
on and stay on as long as the are closed. They go out immediately
switch remains in the ON position. after all doors are locked.

With the light control switch in the


Door Activated position, all the
individual map lights come on when
you unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page 133 ).

With any door or the tailgate left


open, the lights stay on about 3
minutes, then go out. Turn on the front and rear individual
map lights by pushing the lens of
each light. Push the lens again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page 183 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

184
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights

Cargo Area Light Ignition Switch Light

REAR

Instruments and Controls


ON OFF

The cargo area light has a three- The ignition switch light comes on
position switch. In the OFF position, when you open the drivers door, and
the light does not come on. In the stays on several seconds after you
center position, it comes on when close the door.
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

185
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

The courtesy lights in the front The courtesy light between the map
doors come on when you open any lights comes on when you turn the
door. parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

186
Main Menu

Features

The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 188
systems in your vehicle provide a Using Automatic Climate
comfortable driving environment in Control .................................... 193
all weather conditions. Using the Rear A/C Unit .......... 194
Rear Climate Control .................... 197
The standard audio system has Climate Control Sensors ............... 198
many features. This section de- Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 199
scribes those features and how to AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 205

Features
use them. (If you selected an Playing the XM Satellite Radio .... 207
optional audio system, refer to the Playing a CD ................................... 212
operating instructions that came CD Changer.................................... 215
with it.) Protecting Your CDs ..................... 221
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 222
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Playing a Tape ................................ 223
system that requires a code number Steering Wheel Controls .............. 228
to enable it. Radio Theft Protection.................. 229
Rear Entertainment System ......... 230
The security system helps to dis- Playable DVDs ............................... 258
courage vandalism and theft of your Security System ............................. 263
vehicle. Cruise Control ................................ 264
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 267
Parking Sensor System ................. 271
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 275

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

187
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

LX model
RECIRCULATION AIR CONDITIONING REAR WINDOW
BUTTON BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROL TEMPERATURE MODE REAR


BUTTON CONTROL DIAL CONTROL CONTROLLER
DIAL DIAL
EX/Touring models
WINDSHIELD REAR WINDOW REAR REAR LOCK
DEFROSTER BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

RECIRCULATION MODE
BUTTON BUTTON

AUTO AIR CONDITIONING


BUTTON BUTTON

DRIVERS SIDE PASSENGERS SIDE


OFF BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
TEMPERATURE
SYNCHRO BUTTON CONTROL REAR TEMPERATURE/FAN SPEED (EX model)
SWITCHI
nfor
mat
ionPr
CONTROL SWITCH
ovi
dedby:

188
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control bottom () of the button to system out of SYNC mode.


LX model decrease it. Each set temperature is
Turn the dial clockwise to increase shown in the display. When you turn Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the the A/C off, the system cannot This button turns the air
dial counterclockwise to decrease it. regulate the inside temperature if conditioning on and off. On the LX
you set the temperature control model, the indicator in the button is
EX and Touring models below the outside temperature. on when the A/C is on. On the EX
Press the button to increase and Touring models, you will see

Features
the fan speed and airflow. Press the When you set the temperature to its A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
button to decrease it. lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as Lo or Hi. Recirculation Button
Temperature Control When the indicator in the button is
LX model SYNC Button on, air from the vehicles interior is
Turning this dial clockwise increases On EX and Touring models sent throughout the system again.
the temperature of the airflow. When you press this button, the When the indicator is off, air is
indicator in the button comes on, and brought in from the outside of the
EX and Touring models the passengers side temperature vehicle (fresh air mode).
The drivers side temperature and (and the temperature of the rear
the passengers side temperature can passenger compartment on the The outside air intakes for the
be set separately. On the Touring Touring model) is synchronized to heating and cooling system are at
model, the rear passenger the drivers side set temperature. the base of the windshield. Keep this
compartment temperature can also Changing the passengers side area clear of leaves and other debris.
be set separately. Press the top () temperature (or the temperature of
of the appropriate temperature the rear passenger compartment on
control button to increase the the Touring model) makes the
temperature of airflow. Press the indicator to go off, and takes the CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

189
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Rear Window Defogger Button When you select , the system change any settings from it.
This button turns the rear window automatically switches to fresh air See page 197 for how to operate the
defogger on and off (see page 126 ). mode and turns on the A/C. rear passenger control panel.
The passengers temperature cannot
Mode Control be set separately from the drivers. On EX model
Use the mode control dial or button You can change the fan speed of the
to select the vents the air flows from. On LX model only rear system from the front control
Some air will flow from the The system automatically panel. Press the REAR button, the
dashboard vents in all modes. turns on the A/C and switches to indicator in the button comes on.
recirculation mode. Air flows from Push the rear fan control button up
Air flows from the center the center and side vents in the or down to increase or decrease the
and corner vents in the dashboard. dashboard. rear fan speed. When you press the
REAR LOCK button, the indicator in
Airflow is divided between REAR/REAR LOCK Button the button comes on, and the rear
the vents in the dashboard and the On Touring model only passenger control panel is disabled.
floor vents. When you want to change the
temperature of the rear passenger See page 196 for how to operate the
Air flows from the floor compartment, press the REAR rear passenger control panel.
vents. button. The indicator in the button
comes on, and you can change the
Airflow is divided between temperature using the rear
the floor vents and the defroster temperature control button. When
vents at the base of the windshield. you press the REAR LOCK button,
the indicator in the button comes on,
Air flows from the defroster the rear A/C passenger control
vents at the base of the windshield. panel is disabled, and you cannot
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

190
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Ventilation Using the A/C If the interior is very warm, you can
The flow-through ventilation system Air conditioning places an extra load cool it down more rapidly by partially
draws in outside air, circulates it on the engine. Watch the engine opening the windows, turning on the
through the interior, then exhausts it coolant temperature gauge (see page A/C, and setting the fan to
through vents near the rear side 71 ). If it moves near the red mark, maximum speed in fresh air mode.
panels. turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
1. Set the temperature control dial or

Features
button to the lower limit. 1. Press the A/C button. The
2. Make sure the A/C is off. indicator in the button comes on
3. Select and fresh air mode. (LX model) or A/C ON is shown
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. in the display (EX and Touring
models) when a fan speed is
Using the Heater selected.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it 2. Make sure the temperature is set
will be several minutes before you to the lower limit.
feel warm air coming from the
system. 3. Select .

1. Select and fresh air mode. 4. If the outside air is humid, select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. recirculation mode. If the outside
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with air is dry, select fresh air mode.
the temperature control dial or
buttons. 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

191
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
moisture from the air. When used in windows: 1. Select . The system
combination with the heater, it automatically switches to fresh air
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to high. mode and turns on the A/C.
On U.S. vehicles
1. Switch the fan on. 2. Select . The system The indicator in the A/C button
2. Turn on the air conditioning. automatically switches to the fresh will not come on (LX model), or
3. Select and fresh air mode. air mode and turns on the A/C. the A/C ON indicator will not
4. Adjust the temperature to your On U.S. vehicles come on (EX and Touring models).
preference. The indicator in the A/C button 2. Select .
will not come on (LX model), or 3. Set the fan and temperature
This setting is suitable for all driving the A/C ON indicator will not controls to maximum level.
conditions whenever the outside come on (EX and Touring models).
temperature is above 32F (0C). To clear the windows faster, you can
3. Adjust the temperature so the close the dashboard corner vents by
airflow feels warm. rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This will send more warm air to the
4. Select to help clear the windshield defroster vents. Once the
rear window. windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
When you switch to another mode For your safety, make sure you have
from , the A/C stays on. a clear view through all the windows
Press the A/C button to turn it off. before driving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

192
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Using Automatic Climate Control If you set the temperature to its To Turn Everything Off
EX, and Touring models lower or its upper limit, the system LX model
The automatic climate control runs at full cooling or heating only. It Turn the fan speed and temperature
system adjusts the fan speed and does not regulate the interior control dials all the way to the left,
airflow levels to maintain the interior temperature. and turn the rear controller dial to
temperature you select. OFF position.
When you press a fan control button,
1. Press the Auto button. The the fan is taken out of AUTO mode. EX and Touring models

Features
indicator in the button comes on. Press the OFF button and REAR
Semi-automatic Operation button (indicator is off).
2. Set the desired temperature with You can manually select various
the temperature control button. functions of the climate control Keep the system completely off
You will see AUTO in the systems system when it is in fully automatic for short periods only.
display. You can set the drivers mode. All other features remain
side temperature and passengers automatically controlled. Making any To keep stale air and mustiness
side temperature (and the manual selection causes the word from collecting, you should have
temperature of the rear passenger AUTO in the display to go out. the fan running at all times.
compartment on the Touring
model) separately. The system
automatically selects the proper
mix of conditioned and/or heated
air that will, as quickly as possible,
raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

193
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Using the Rear A/C Unit Rear Controller Dial ON The rear A/C passenger
LX and EX models control panel is enabled. A second
You can adjust the airflow of the rear row passenger can then adjust the
A/C unit with the rear controller dial fan speed, airflow, and temperature.
on the front control panel. The rear Turning the rear controller dial to
passengers can also adjust the the right increases the rear fan
direction and the amount of airflow speed.
on the rear control panel.

Touring model
You can adjust the temperature of
the rear A/C unit with the REAR
button and the rear temperature
control button on the front control
panel. LX model
OFF No air flows to the rear
vents, and the rear control panel is
turned off.

When you select a fan speed with the


rear controller dial, the rear control
panel is disabled.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

194
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

REAR A/C Controls Touring model REAR LOCK Button When the
EX model indicator in this button is on, the rear
control panel is disabled, and the
rear system is controlled by the front
control panel.

Features
REAR Button When the
REAR Button When the indicator in this button is off, no air
indicator in this button is off, no air flows to the rear vents, and the rear
flows to the rear vents, and the rear control panel is turned off. When the
control panel is turned off. When the indicator in this button is on, the
indicator in this button is on, the fan temperature of the rear passenger
speed of the rear passenger compartment can be adjusted with
compartment can be adjusted with the rear temperature control button.
the rear fan speed control button. A A second row passenger can also
second row passenger can also adjust the temperature, fan speed,
adjust the temperature, fan speed, and airflow.
and airflow.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

195
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Rear Control Panel Turn the fan speed control dial


clockwise to increase fan speed and
LX model EX model airflow.

Select the vents the air flows from


with the mode control dial.

When is selected, air flows


from the rear ceiling vents.

When is selected, air flows


from the rear floor vents.

When is selected, airflow is


LX model EX model divided between the rear floor vents
You can use the rear control panel You can use the rear control panel and rear ceiling vents.
when the rear controller dial on the when the indicator in the REAR
front control panel is in the ON LOCK button on the front control Turn the rear temperature control
position. panel is off. dial clockwise to increase the
temperature of the airflow.
When you press the CTRL button in
the left dial, the indicator comes on,
and the fan speed is regulated by the
outer ring of the fan control dial.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

196
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Climate Control

Press the top () of the fan control temperature of the rear passenger
button to increase the fan speed and compartment.
Touring model airflow. Press the bottom () of the
button to decrease it. The level of Pressing the OFF button shuts off
the fan speed is shown in the display. the rear climate control system.

Each time you press the mode


button, the mode display changes

Features
from , to , then to
.
TEMPERATURE FAN CONTROL When is selected, air flows
BUTTON BUTTON from the rear ceiling vents.

Touring model When is selected, air flows


You can use the rear control panel from the rear floor vents.
when the indicator in the REAR
LOCK button on the front control When is selected, airflow is
panel is off. divided between the rear floor vents
Press the top () of the and rear ceiling vents.
temperature control button to
increase the temperature of airflow, Pressing the AUTO button puts the
and the bottom () of the button to system in automatic operation mode.
decrease it. The temperature you The rear system automatically
adjust is shown in the system display. adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

197
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Climate Control, Climate Control Sensors

Rear Ceiling Vents Sunlight and Temperature


Sensors
TAB
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

LEVER
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The direction and quantity of airflow
from each rear ceiling vent is The climate control system has three
adjustable. sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
To adjust the direction of air coming temperature sensor is next to the
from a rear ceiling vent, move the steering column. There is also a rear
tab in the center of each vent back- sensor on the rear sidewall near the
and-forth, and rotate the vent with exhaust vent. Do not cover the
the tab. The lever next to each vent sensors or spill any liquid on them.
can be opened and closed to regulate
the amount of airflow.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

198
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

LX model EX model without RES

FM BUTTON AM/FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON TUNE/SOUND SOUND TUNE KNOB


KNOB PWR/VOL
PWR/VOL KNOB KNOB
KNOB

Features
PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN SCAN
BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK BAR SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT AUTO SELECT
BUTTON BUTTON

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

199
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

EX and Touring models with Touring model with RES and


RES without Navigation System Navigation System

AM/FM BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL TUNE/SOUND AUTO SELECT AM/FM BUTTON SEEK BAR


KNOB KNOB BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
PWR/VOL TUNE/SOUND
SCAN SEEK BAR KNOB KNOB
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

200
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

To Play the AM/FM Radio TUNE Use the TUNE knob to If you do nothing, the system will
The ignition switch must be in the tune the radio to a desired frequency. then scan for the next strong station
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the knob right to tune to a and play it for 5 seconds. When it
Turn the system on by pushing the higher frequency, or left to tune to a plays a station you want to listen to,
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume lower frequency. press the SCAN button again.
by turning the same knob.
SEEK The SEEK function Preset Each preset button can
The band and frequency that the searches up and down from the store one frequency on AM, and two

Features
radio was last tuned to is displayed. current frequency to find a station frequencies on FM.
To change bands, press the AM or with a strong signal. To activate it 1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM button, or AM/FM button. On press the or side of the bar, FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
the FM band, ST will be displayed if then release it. two frequencies with each preset
the station is broadcasting in stereo. button.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not SCAN The SCAN function
available. samples all stations with strong 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
signals on the selected band. To function to tune the radio to a
To Select a Station activate it, press the SCAN button, desired station.
You can use any of five methods to then release it. You will see SCAN in
find radio stations on the selected the display. The system will scan for 3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the a station with a strong signal. When until you hear a beep.
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 5 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

201
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

The preset frequencies will be lost if If you do not like the stations auto mode.
your vehicles battery goes dead, is select has stored, you can store
disconnected, or the radio fuse is other frequencies on the preset Treble/Bass Use the TRE/BAS
removed. buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or modes to adjust the tone to your
SCAN functions to find stations, then liking.
AUTO SELECT If you are store them in the preset buttons as
traveling far from home and can no described. Balance/Fader These two
longer receive your preset stations, To turn off Auto Select, press the modes adjust the strength of the
you can use the auto select feature to A. SEL button. This restores the sound coming from each speaker.
find stations in the local area. presets you originally set. BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
Press the A. SEL button. A.SEL Adjusting the Sound strength.
flashes in the display, and the system Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
goes into scan mode for several repeatedly to display the bass (BAS),
seconds. It stores the frequencies of treble (TRE), balance (BAL), and
six AM, and twelve FM stations in fader (FAD) settings.
the preset buttons.
Each mode is shown in the display as
You will see a 0 displayed after it changes. Turn the SOUND
pressing a preset button if auto (TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
select cannot find a strong station for your liking. When the level reaches
every preset button. the center, you will see in
the display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

202
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Operating the Radio on the (FM1, FM2, or AM). Adjusting the Sound
Navigation System Screen
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SEEK AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages 201 and 202 .

AUTO SELECT Touch the

Features
AUTO SELECT icon to activate the
auto select function. You will see
AUTO SEL flashing in the upper
display.

SCAN Touch the SCAN icon to


activate the scan function. You will You can also adjust the sound from
On models with Navigation System see SCAN in the display. Touch the the navigation screen.
In addition to the knobs and buttons icon again to deactivate it.
on the radio control panel, you can To adjust the sound, push the
operate some of the radio controls AUDIO DISPLAY button, then enter
on the navigation system screen. the sound grid by touching the
SOUND icon on the display.
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

203
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Left/Right Balance and Front/ Audio System Lighting


Rear Fader These modes adjust You can use the instrument panel
the strength of the sound coming brightness control knob to adjust the
from each speaker. Left/Right illumination of the audio system (see
balance adjusts the side-to-side page 125 ). The audio system
strength, while Front/Rear fader illuminates when the parking lights
adjust the front-to-back strength. To are on, even if the radio is off.
adjust the left/right balance, touch
the L or R icon.

To adjust the front/rear fader, touch


the FR or RR icon.

Treble/Bass To adjust the treble To see the audio display when you
and bass, touch or on each are finished adjusting the sound,
side of the treble or bass adjustment wait 5 seconds.
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

204
Main Menu Table of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception


The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the stations
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz A radio stations signal gets weaker

Features
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least ten AM station, you will notice the sound
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). volume becoming weaker and the
Stations on the FM band are station drifting in and out. If you are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
Stations must use these exact Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
frequencies. It is fairly common for go off and the sound will fade also affect your radios reception.
stations to round-off the frequency in completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
their advertising, so your radio could the stations signal. stations, or hear only the station you
display a frequency of 100.9 even are close to.
though the announcer may identify
the station as FM101.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

205
Main Menu Table of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception

As required by the FCC:


Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
authority to operate the equipment.

Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by


band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the stations transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

206
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Touring model with RES and


Navigation System SCAN BUTTON XM RADIO DISPLAY/MODE
BUTTON BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

Features
PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

EX model without RES EX and Touring models with


RES without Navigation System
PWR/VOL XM RADIO
KNOB BUTTON PWR/VOL XM RADIO
TUNE KNOB KNOB BUTTON TUNE KNOB

DISPLAY/MODE
BUTTON DISPLAY/
MODE
BUTTON

PRESET SCAN BUTTON PRESET CATEGORY BAR


SCAN BUTTON BUTTONS CATEGORY BAR BUTTONS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

207
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

U.S. EX and Touring models only VOL knob. The last channel you
Your audio system is capable of listened to will show in the display.
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States, You can also change to the XM radio
except Hawaii and Alaska. while you are listening to an FM
XM is a registered trademark of station, AM station, CD, etc., by
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
XM radio receives signals from two the audio display (navigation system
satellites to produce clear, high- screen).
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories. MODE To switch between
Along with a large selection of channel mode and category mode,
different types of music, XM radio press and hold the DISP/MODE
allows you to view channel and button until the mode changes. On the audio display, you will see the
category selections in the display. selected CHANNEL (number),
The navigation system screen also In channel mode, you can select all CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
shows all XM information when the of the available channels. In category and TITLE (music title).
AUDIO button is pressed. mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the You may experience periods when
Operating the XM Radio channels within that category. XM Radio does not transmit the
To listen to XM radio, turn the Each time you press and release the artists name and song title
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) DISP/MODE button, the display information. If this happens, there is
or ON (II). Push the PWR/VOL changes in the following sequence: nothing wrong with your system.
knob to turn on the audio system, Channel name, channel number,
and press the XM button. Adjust category, artist name, and music title.
the volume by turning the PWR/
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

208
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

On models with a rear entertainment seconds, then selects the next can be selected.
system and a navigation system, you channel. When you hear a channel
cannot listen to XM Radio and a disc you want to continue listening to, 3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
at the same time. For example, when press the button or touch the icon want for that channel. Press and
XM Radio is playing on the front again. hold the button (icon) until you
speakers, you cannot listen to a disc hear a beep.
on the rear speakers, or vice versa. Preset You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
preset channels using the six preset first six channels.

Features
TUNE Turn the tune knob left or buttons or preset icons on the audio 5. Press the XM RADIO button again
right to select channels. In the display. Each button stores one or touch the other XM icon (XM1
category mode, you can only select channel from the XM1 band and one or XM2) on the audio display.
channels within that category. channel from the XM2 band. Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
CATEGORY Press either side of To store a channel:
the bar ( or ) to select another 1. Press the XM RADIO button. Once a channel is stored, press and
category. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in release the proper preset button
the display. (icon) to tune to it.
SCAN The scan function gives 2. Use the TUNE knob, or the
you a sampling of all channels while CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to The presets will be lost if your
in the channel mode. In the category tune to a desired channel. You can vehicles battery goes dead, is
mode, only the channels within that also touch the SCAN icon on the disconnected, or the radio fuse is
category are scanned. To activate audio display. removed.
scan, press the SCAN/RPT button or
touch the SCAN icon on the audio In the category mode, only channels
display. The system plays each within that category can be selected.
channel in numerical order for a few In the channel mode, all channels
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

209
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

The XM satellites are in orbit over


Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.

SATELLITE

GROUND
REPEATER

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

210
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: knob until 0 appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the users After youve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.

Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving in the tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, category
of you. (I) or ON (II) position, push the or CH will appear in the display,
Driving on the lower level of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio and youll be able to listen to XM
multi-tiered road. system and press the XM RADIO radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
Driving on a single lane road button. A variety of music types and continue to send an activation signal
alongside dense trees taller than styles will play. to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. from the activation request. If the
If you decide to purchase XM service has not been activated after
There may be other geographic Satellite Radio service, contact XM 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
situations that could affect XM radio Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
reception. 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

211
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

LX model EX model without RES


CD SLOT
AM
BUTTON CD SLOT LOAD CD BUTTON
INDICATOR
EJECT FM
BUTTON BUTTON LOAD AM/FM EJECT
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON

SEEK BAR
SEEK BAR
REPEAT DISC REPEAT
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON DISC
DISC BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON BUTTON DISC
RANDOM BUTTON
CD BUTTON BUTTON

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

212
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

EX and Touring models with


Touring model with RES and
RES without Navigation
Navigation System
System
LOAD LOAD EJECT
LOAD BUTTON
INDICATOR BUTTON INDICATOR
LOAD EJECT
BUTTON CD SLOT BUTTON

Features
RANDOM
BUTTON CD BUTTON
REPEAT SEEK BAR
BUTTON

CD BUTTON SEEK BAR


REPEAT DISC
BUTTON BUTTON
DISC
RANDOM BUTTON
BUTTON

DISC BUTTON DISC BUTTON

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

213
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Player

CD Player To Change Tracks (SKIP) To Stop Playing a CD


LX model Each time you press and release the Press the eject button ( ) to
With the ignition in the side of the SKIP bar, the player remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, skips forward to the beginning of the but do not remove it from the slot,
insert a CD into the CD slot. The next track. Press and release the the system will automatically reload
drive will pull the CD in the rest of side of the SKIP bar to skip the CD after 15 seconds and put it in
the way and begin to play it. You backward to the beginning of the pause mode. To begin playing, press
operate the CD player with the same previous track. the CD button.
controls used for the radio. The To move rapidly within a track, press
number of the track playing is shown and hold the or side of the Press the AM or FM button to
in the display. The system will SKIP bar. You will see CUE or REW switch to the radio while a CD is
continuously play a CD until you in the display. playing. Press the CD button to play
change modes. the CD.
REPEAT To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT If you turn the system off while a CD
button. You will see RPT in the is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. display. Press the RPT button again knob or by turning off the ignition,
The label can curl up and cause the CD to turn it off. the CD will stay in the drive. When
to jam in the unit. you turn the system back on, the CD
RANDOM This feature plays the will begin playing where it left off.
tracks in random order. To activate
Random Play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. This continues until you
press the RDM button again.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

214
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Operating the CD Changer Loading CDs in the Changer


EX and Touring models On vehicles with navigation system
Your audio system has an in-dash
CD changer that holds up to six CDs, LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.

Features
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be OPEN BUTTON
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. To return the screen to the upright
position, press the OPEN button
again. Do not use the folded screen
as a tray. If you put a cup, for To load multiple CDs in one
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. example, on the screen, the liquid operation:
The label can curl up and cause the CD inside the cup may spill on the
to jam in the unit. screen when you go over a bump. 1. Press and hold the LOAD button
beside the CD slot until you see
On vehicles with navigation system LOADING in the display, then
The CD changer is behind the release the button.
navigation system screen. To use the
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

215
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

2. The indicators above the Disc If you stop loading CDs before all six If you press the LOAD button while
buttons of the empty positions will positions are filled, the system will a CD is playing, the system will stop
blink, and the green load indicator wait for 10 seconds, then stop the playing that CD and start the loading
above the CD slot comes on. load operation and begin playing the sequence. It will then play the CD
last CD loaded. just loaded.
3. Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the To load a single CD: You can also load a CD into an empty
drive will pull it in the rest of the position while a CD is playing by
way. You will see BUSY in the 1. Press and release the LOAD pressing the appropriate Disc button.
display. The CD load indicator button. Select an empty Disc button (the
turns red and blinks as the CD is indicator above the button is off),
loaded. 2. The indicators above the Disc and press the button. The system
buttons of the empty positions will will stop playing the current CD and
4. When LOADING appears again in blink, and the green CD load start the loading sequence. It will
the display, insert the next CD into indicator comes on. When you see then play the CD just loaded.
the CD slot. LOAD in the display, insert the
disc into the CD slot. Insert it only
5. Repeat this until all six positions about halfway; the drive will pull it
are loaded. The system will then in the rest of the way.
begin playing the first CD loaded.
3. The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

216
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

On vehicles without navigation system 4. When LOAD appears again in the To load a single CD:
To load multiple CDs in one display, insert the next CD into the
operation: CD slot. 1. Press and release the LOAD
button.
1. Press and hold the Load button 5. Repeat this until all six positions
until you hear a beep and see are loaded. The system will then 2. When the disc number for an
LOAD in the display, then begin playing last CD loaded. empty position starts to blink and
release the button. the green CD load indicator comes

Features
If you are not loading CDs into all six on, you will see LOAD in the
2. On the upper right side of the positions, press the LOAD button display. Insert the disc into the CD
display, the disc number for an again after the last CD has loaded. slot. Insert it only about halfway,
empty position will begin blinking, The system will begin playing the the drive will pull it in the rest of
and the green CD load indicator last CD loaded. the way.
will come on.
If you stop loading CDs before all six 3. The system will load the CD, and
3. Insert the CD into the CD slot. positions are filled, the system will begin playing it.
Insert it only about halfway; the wait for ten seconds, then stop the
drive will pull it in the rest of the load operation and begin playing the
way. You will see BUSY in the last CD loaded.
display. The CD Loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

217
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

To Play a CD To move rapidly within a track, press To Change Tracks


Select the CD changer by pressing and hold the or side of the Each time you press the side of
the CD button. You will see CD in SKIP bar. You will hear a beep and the SKIP bar, the system skips
the display. The system will begin the system will continue to move forward to the beginning of the next
playing the last selected disc in the through the track. Press the side track. Press and release the side
CD changer. You will see the disc of the SKIP bar to move forward, or to skip backward to the beginning of
and track numbers displayed. the side to move backward. the current track. Press it again to
Release the bar when the system skip to the beginning of the previous
When that CD ends, the next CD in reaches the point you want. track.
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last CD finishes, the On models with a rear entertainment
system returns to CD 1. system and a navigation system, you
cannot listen to a disc and XM Radio
To select a different CD, press the at the same time. For example, when
appropriate preset button (1 6). If a disc is playing on the front
you select an empty position in the speakers, you cannot listen to XM
CD changer, the system will go into Radio on the rear speakers, or vice
the loading sequence. versa.

You can use the SKIP bar while a


disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

218
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Track Scan Disc Scan Track Repeat


When you press the SCAN button or When you press and hold the SCAN When you press and release the RPT
touch the TRACK SCAN icon on the button until you see D-Scan in the button or touch the TRACK RPT
upper display, the first track of the display, or when you touch the DISC icon on the upper display, the system
current disc plays for about 10 SCAN icon on the upper display, the continuously replays the current
seconds. You will see SCAN in the first track of the current CD plays track. As a reminder, you will see
upper display and in the audio for about 10 seconds. You will see D- REPEAT (TRACK REPEAT) in the
display. To hear the rest of the track, SCAN in the display and DISC SCAN display. To turn this feature off,

Features
press the SCAN button or touch the in the upper display. To hear the rest press the RPT button, or touch the
TRACK SCAN icon again within 10 of the CD, press the SCAN button or TRACK REPEAT icon again.
seconds. If you dont, the system touch the DISC SCAN icon again,
advances to the next track, plays within 10 seconds. If you dont, the Disc Repeat
about 10 seconds of it, and continues system advances to the next disc, When you press and hold the RPT
through the rest of the tracks the plays about 10 seconds of it, and button until REPEAT is in the
same way. continues throughout the rest of the display, or when you touch the DISC
CDs the same way. When the RPT icon on the audio display, the
system reaches the last disc, DISC system continuously replays the
SCAN is cancelled, and the CD plays current disc. As a reminder, you will
normally. see D-RPT (DISC RPT) in the
display.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

219
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Random Play where it left off. To remove the disc from the
When you press the RDM button or changer, first select it by pressing
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on If you turn the system off while a CD the appropriate disc button or
the upper display, the system plays is playing, either with the PWR/VOL corresponding number on the preset
the tracks of the current disc in knob or the ignition switch, play will button. When that disc begins
random order. You will see continue at the same point when you playing, press the eject button.
RANDOM (TRACK RANDOM) in turn it back on.
the display. To turn this feature off, When you press the eject button
press the RDM button (touch Removing CDs from the Changer while listening to the radio, or with
TRACK RANDOM) again. To remove the disc that is currently the audio system turned off, the disc
Operation of TRACK SCAN, DISC playing, press the eject button. You that was last selected is ejected.
SCAN, TRACK REPEAT, DISC will see EJECT in the display. After that disc is ejected, pressing
REPEAT, and TRACK RANDOM on When you remove the disc from the the eject button again will eject the
the upper display is possible only slot, the system automatically begins next disc in numerical order. By
when the audio display is in the the load sequence so you can load doing this six times, you can remove
upright position. another disc in that position. If you all the discs from the changer.
do not load another CD, within 15
To Stop Playing a Disc seconds, the system selects the You can also eject discs when the
To take the system out of CD mode, previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or ignition switch is on or off:
press the AM/FM button or SAT XM Radio (U.S. models)].
RADIO button (U.S. models). Each To eject one disc, press and release
time you press the AM/FM button, If you do not remove the CD from the eject button.
the system changes to the next the slot, the system will reload the
mode (AM, FM1, or FM2). When CD after 15 seconds and put the CD To eject all discs, press and hold the
you return to CD mode by pressing changer in pause mode. To begin eject button until the indicators
the CD button, play will continue playing the CD, press the CD button. above the disc buttons blink.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

220
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Your CDs

General Information Protecting CDs


When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
recording must be closed for it to
be used. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.

Features
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects in


the CD player or the CD changer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

221
Main Menu Table of Contents

CD Changer Error Messages

If you see an error message in the


display while playing a CD, find the Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the disc eject button, and remove the
the vehicle to your dealer. disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

222
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a Tape

LX model EX model without RES

Features
NR BUTTON NR BUTTON
REW REW
BUTTON BUTTON
PLAY/PROG PLAY/PROG SKIP BAR
BUTTON SKIP BAR BUTTON
FF BUTTON FF BUTTON
REPEAT REPEAT
BUTTON BUTTON
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

223
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a Tape

EX and Touring models with Touring model with RES and


RES without Navigation Navigation System
System

SKIP BAR

REW
NR BUTTON BUTTON
REW
BUTTON PLAY/PROG NR BUTTON
BUTTON
PLAY/PROG
BUTTON SKIP BAR FF BUTTON
FF BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

224
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a Tape

To Play a Tape Dolby noise reduction turns on To switch to the radio or CD player
Optional on all models when you insert a tape. The while a tape is playing, press the AM
The ignition switch must be in the indicator will come on in the or FM button or AM/FM button, or
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. display. If the tape was not recorded CD button. To change back to the
Make sure the open side of the tape in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the tape player, press the AUX button.
is facing right, then insert the tape NR button. Dolby remains off until
most of the way into the slot. The you press the NR button again. Tape Search Functions
system will pull the tape in the rest FF/REW To rewind the tape,

Features
of the way, and begin to play it.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under push the REW button. You will see
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing REW in the display. To fast forward
The tape direction indicator will Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol the tape, push the FF button. You
come on to show you which side of are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories will see FF displayed. Press the FF,
the tape is playing. The indicates Licensing Corporation. REW, or PLAY/PROG button to
the side you inserted upward is now take the system out of rewind or fast
playing. If you want to play the other To Stop Playing a Tape forward.
side, press the PLAY/PROG button. To remove the tape, press the
When the player reaches the end of EJECT button. If you want to turn
the tape, it will automatically reverse the player off, press the PWR/VOL
direction and play the other side. knob or turn off the ignition. The
tape will remain in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the
tape will begin playing where it left
off.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

225
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a Tape

SKIP Press the side of the Caring for the Tape and Player the player.
SKIP bar to find the beginning of the The tape player picks up dirt and
current song or passage. Press the oxides from the tape. This Store tapes in their cases to protect
side of the SKIP bar to find the contamination builds up over time them from dust and moisture. Never
beginning of a song or passage. and causes the sound quality to place tapes where they will be
When the system reaches the degrade. To prevent this, you should exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
beginning of a song or passage, it clean the player after every 30 hours or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
begins to play it. of use. to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
REPEAT Press the RPT button If you do not clean the tape player inserting it into the player.
to continuously play a song or regularly, it may eventually become
passage. You will see RPT displayed. impossible to remove the Never try to insert foreign objects
The track will repeat until you press contamination with a normal into the tape player.
the RPT button again. cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
NOTE: The SKIP and REPEAT
functions use silent periods on the Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
tape to find the end of a song or Tapes longer than that may break or
passage. These features may not jam the drive.
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise If the tape is loose, tighten it by
level, or a silent period in the middle turning the hub with a pencil or your
of a selection. finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

226
Main Menu Table of Contents

Setting the Clock

LX model EX model CLOCK BUTTON


CLOCK BUTTON

Features
H BUTTON R BUTTON
M BUTTON H BUTTON R BUTTON
M BUTTON

On models without Navigation System When you are finished, press the For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
If your vehicles battery is CLOCK button again. 1:52 will reset to 2:00
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the On models with Navigation System
nearest hour. If the displayed time is Refer to the Navigation system
Press and hold the CLOCK button before the half hour, pressing and manual for how to adjust the time.
until the clock flashes. Change the holding the CLOCK button, then
hours by pressing the H button until pressing the R (RESET) button sets
the numbers advance to the desired the clock back to the previous hour.
time. Change the minutes by If the displayed time is after the half
pressing the M button until the hour, the clock sets forward to the
numbers advance to the desired time. beginning of the next hour.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

227
Main Menu Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Controls

VOL BUTTON MODE BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
up () or down (). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button and hold it track each time you press the top
until the desired volume is reached, () of the CH button. Press the
then release it. bottom () to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it again to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display.
XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if a
disc is loaded) or a tape (if the If you are playing a tape, press the
CH BUTTON optional tape player is installed and a top () of the CH button to advance
tape is loaded). to the next selection. Press the
On EX and Touring models bottom () to go back to the
Three controls for the audio system If you are listening to the radio, use previous selection. The system
are mounted in the steering wheel the CH button to change stations. senses a silent period, then goes
hub. These let you control basic Each time you press the top () of back to play mode.
functions without removing your the button, the system goes to the
hand from the steering wheel. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
() to go back to the previous
station.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

228
Main Menu Table of Contents

Radio Theft Protection

On EX and Touring models If your vehicles battery is discon- You will have to store your favorite
Your vehicles audio system will nected or goes dead, or the radio stations in the preset buttons after
disable itself if it is disconnected fuse is removed, the audio system the system begins working. Your
from electrical power for any reason. will disable itself. If this happens, original settings were lost when the
To make it work again, you must you will see in the power was disconnected.
enter a specific five-digit code with frequency display the next time you
the preset buttons. Because there turn on the system. Use the preset
are hundreds of number buttons to enter the five-digit code.

Features
combinations possible from the five The code is located on the radio code
digits, making the system work card included in your Owners
without knowing the exact code is Manual kit. When it is entered
nearly impossible. correctly, the radio will start playing.

You should have received a card that If you make a mistake entering the
lists your audio system code number code, do not start over; complete the
and serial number. It is best to store five-digit sequence, then enter the
this card in a safe place at home. In correct code. You have ten tries to
addition, you should write the audio enter the correct code. If you are
systems serial number in this unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
Owners Manual. must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
If you should happen to lose the card,
you must obtain the code number
from a Honda dealer. To do this, you
will need the systems serial number.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

229
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Models with Navigation System Overhead Screen Unit

REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CONTROL KNOB

Models without Navigation System


DVD Player
REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CONTROL KNOB

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

230
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Available on EX with Leather and To Turn On the System Rear Speakers


Touring models Press the REAR PWR button. To When you turn on the system, the
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear turn on the rear controls (ceiling rear speakers are automatically
entertainment system that includes a panel/remote control), press the RR turned off if the rear system selects
DVD player for the enjoyment of the CTRL knob. The systems icon a different entertainment source
rear passengers. shows in the upper display. Your than the front system. You will see
passengers can then operate the rear the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
With this system, the rear system with the control panel in the upper display. The sound for the rear

Features
passengers can enjoy a different ceiling. The rear control panel can be system is sent to the wireless
entertainment source (radio, CD used as a remote control when it is headphones.
changer, DVD player, or optional detached from the ceiling unit. Press
tape player) than the front seat the RR CTRL knob again to turn the If you want to turn the rear speakers
occupants. The audio is broadcast rear controls off. You will see the on again, press and hold the REAR
through the supplied wireless Rear Controls Off icon in the upper PWR button until the Rear Speakers
headphones. display. Off icon goes off.

The ignition switch must be in the The rear system selects the source it NOTE: The rear speakers are
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position was last set to. If that source has connected to the front system, so
to operate the rear entertainment been removed (the DVD has been they will always play the source that
system. ejected from the player, for example), the front system is set to.
you will see DVD EJECT in the
display. You must select another
source.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

231
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To Select Rear Entertainment Operating the DVD Player from REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment The DVD player in your rear
system from the front panel, turn the entertainment system can play DVD
RR CTRL knob clockwise. The video discs and CDs.
amber RR LED comes on to show
that the control panel is enabled.

To play the radio, the buttons for the


front entertainment system have the OPEN BUTTON
same functions.
OVERHEAD SCREEN
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,
select CD. If a CD is loaded in the Open the overhead screen by
lower player, select DVD/AUX. pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

232
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Models with Navigation System Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.
The amber Rear LED comes on to
REAR CTRL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR show that the control panel is now
enabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CD


player below the front panel.

Features
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.

PLAY BUTTON PAUSE BUTTON PLAY Press the PLAY button if


the DVD does not start playing
Models without Navigation System automatically.
REAR CTRL KNOB
PAUSE Press the PAUSE button
to pause the DVD. Press the button
EJECT
BUTTON again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.

PLAY BUTTON PAUSE SEEK/SKIP BAR


BUTTON
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

233
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

SEEK/SKIP Press and hold the EJECT Press the eject button to Using the Rear Control Panel
side to move forward; you will see remove the DVD from the drive. To turn on the rear entertainment
CUE in the display. Press and hold system from the rear control panel,
the side to move backward; you To Return to Front Audio press the PWR button. Use the AM/
will see REV in the display. Controls FM button, XM RADIO button (U.S.
Release the bar when the system To return front panel control to the models), CD button, DVD/AUX
reaches the point you want. front audio system, turn the REAR button (U.S. models), or AUX button
CTRL knob counterclockwise. (Canadian models) to select the
Each time you press and release the entertainment source. The selected
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the source will be shown in the display.
system skips forward to the Make sure the rear control operation
beginning of the next track or has not been disabled with the REAR
chapter. Press and release the CTRL knob on the front panel.
side of the bar to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

234
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To Play the Radio from the Rear


Control Panel
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the radio preset buttons.
Press the button to tune the radio
to a higher frequency, or press the
button to tune to a lower frequency.
Pressing the or button

Features
causes the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.

To Play the XM Radio from the when the radio is in the category
Rear Control Panel mode.
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the radio preset buttons.
Press the button to search up
the channels in the channel mode.
The system will search up the
channels within the category when
the radio is in the category mode.
Press the button to search
down the channels in the channel
mode. The system will search down
the channels within the category CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

235
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Press the or button to To Play a CD from the Rear To Play the Optional Tape Player
select another category. Control Panel from the Rear Control Panel
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer, To rewind the tape, push the
Pressing and holding the DISP select them by pressing the CD button. You will see REW in
button for more than 5 seconds will button. If a CD is loaded in the DVD the display. To fast forward the tape,
change the search mode between player, press the DVD/AUX button. push the button. You will see
Channel Search and Category Press the button to skip to the FF displayed.
Search. Each time you press and beginning of the next track. Press
release the DISP button, the display the button to return to the Press the button to find the
above the rear control panel changes beginning of the current track. beginning of the current song or
in the following sequence: Channel passage. Press the button to
Number, Category Name, Music To move rapidly within a track, press find the beginning of the next song
Name, Artist Name, Channel Name, and hold the or button. or passage.
and back to Channel Number. The system will continue to move
through the track. Press the Press the button to change the
button to move forward, or the tape direction.
button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer


and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the or button changes
the discs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

236
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To Play a DVD from the Rear REAR CONTROL PANEL


Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.

Open the overhead screen by

Features
pushing the OPEN button. The OPEN
screen will swing down part-way. BUTTON
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
OVERHEAD SCREEN
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen Press the button when you chapter. Press the button to
back to the second or first detent to want to pause the DVD. Press this move forward, or the button to
turn the display back on. To close button again to go back to PLAY. move backward. Release the button
the screen, pivot it up until it latches. when the system reaches the point
Press the button to skip to the you want.
beginning of the next chapter. Press To select the menu on the DVD,
the button to return to the press the MENU/SCROLL button
beginning of the current chapter. (U.S. models) or MENU button
(Canadian models). Use the ,
To move rapidly within a chapter, , , and buttons to
press and hold the or move to the desired menu selection,
button. The system will then press the ENT button to enter
continue to move through the your selection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

237
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

DISP Button

When you press the DISP button When you press the DISP button To go back to play, press the DISP
while a DVD is playing, the title, again, the subtitle, audio, angle, button.
chapter, elapsed time, and personal sound characteristics, and personal
surround logo are displayed surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 1). (STATUS 2).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

238
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode

Features
When you press the MENU button When you press the SETUP button When you select Play Mode by
while a DVD is playing, the DVDs while a DVD is playing, the DVDs pressing the or button, the
main menu is displayed. To go back setup menu is displayed at the play mode setup menu is displayed
to play, press the RETURN button. bottom of the screen. You can then above the Play Mode icon.
change various settings of play mode,
personal surround, and display. To
go back to play without changing any
setting, press the RETURN or
SETUP button, or select Close by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

239
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Top Menu Audio The selectable languages vary from


DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN or ENT button


to go back to the play mode setup
menu.

When you select TOP MENU When you select Audio from the
using the or button, the DVDs play mode setup menu by pressing
title menu is displayed. This menu is the or button, you will see a
also displayed when you press the submenu of the dubbed language.
MENU button while a DVD is not
playing. Select the desired language by
pressing the or button. The
To go back to play, press the return sound characteristics (Dolby Digital,
button. LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language are also
displayed next to the language.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

240
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Subtitle Angle

Features
To turn the subtitle on and off, select If more than one subtitle language is On some DVDs, the scenes are
Subtitle from the setup menu by available, you will see the language recorded by more than one camera,
pressing the or button. You will currently selected when you select giving different viewpoints of the
see submenu OFF or ON. Select ON in the previous step. same scene. To change the angle,
OFF or ON by pressing the or Select the desired subtitle language select Angle from the setup menu.
button. by pressing the or button. You will see a submenu if there are
Press the RETURN or ENT button different angles available.
to go back to the play mode setup Select the number on the submenu
menu. by pressing the or button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

241
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Search

When you select the Search from To do a title search, select Title by To do a chapter search, select
the play mode setup menu, you will pressing the or button. Change Chapter by pressing the or
see the submenu shown above. In the number on the right submenu by button. Change the number on the
the left submenu, you can select pressing the or button, and right submenu by pressing the or
between Title and Chapter. The press the ENT button to begin the button, and press the ENT button
right submenu displays the current title search. If you press the to begin the chapter search. If you
title or chapter number and the total RETURN button, the display returns press the RETURN button, the
number of titles or chapters. to the play mode setup menu without display returns to the play mode
doing the search. setup menu without doing the search.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

242
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Num Input

Features
A numerical command can be issued change from the left side to right Select and enter the second digit
to a DVD by inputting a two digit side or right to left. number the same way. The cursor
number, and a button number can be will automatically move to the ENT
selected on the screen. Select the first digit number using icon when you press the ENT button.
the , , , or Press the ENT button to enter the
Select the Num Input from the play button, and enter it by pressing number command. To go back to the
mode setup menu. The screen will the ENT button. If you want to DVD screen, press the RETURN
change as shown above. If you select change the number, select DEL, button.
the Move Key using the , and press the ENT button, then
, , or button, and select and enter the new number.
press the ENT button, the Num
Input display on the screen will CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

243
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Personal Surround are playing. Display

Select Cinema, Music, or Voice


by pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENT button. The PERSONAL
SURROUND logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.

If you select Off, the logo


disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.

To adjust the display, select


When you select PERSONAL Display by pressing the or
SURROUND by pressing the button, and enter your
or button, the personal selection by pressing the ENT
surround setup menu is displayed button. The display changes as
above the PERSONAL shown above.
SURROUND icon. You can adjust these display
settings:
Selecting one of the sound effects, Back Light
Cinema, Music, or Voice, from the Contrast
personal surround menu allows you Brightness
to change the sound in your Tint
headphones to match the disc you Color
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

244
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features
Select the quality you want to adjust If you want to set the display to the The display changes as shown above.
by pressing the or button, and default setting, select Reset by
then pressing the ENT button. The pressing the or button, and, Select Yes, and press the ENT
adjustment bar is displayed next to then pressing the ENT button. button. You will see the message
the selected item. Adjust the setting Default display settings applied on
by pressing the or button. the display for 5 seconds.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, press the ENT button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

245
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Screen Mode
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:

Normal Normal Wide


Wide
Zoom
Full

Zoom Full

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

246
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

The selected setting will be


highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.

Features
Select the Aspect Ratio by pressing The selectable setting menu is
the or button, then press displayed, and the current setting is
the ENT button. highlighted in blue.

Select the desired setting by


pressing the or button, then
press the ENT button.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

247
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language) Menu Language

When you press the SETUP button When you select Language with To select the language used in the
on the rear control panel when a the or button, the menu DISC menus, select Menu Lang by
DVD is not playing, the INITIAL shown above appears. pressing the or button. You will
SETTINGS menu is displayed. see the submenu next to Menu
To retune to the stop or prestop Lang.
There are two selectable menus: screen, select Close using the
Language and Others. or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

248
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features
Select the desired language by If you want another language than If you select the No, and press the
pressing the or button, and those listed, you need to enter the ENT button, the display returns to
then pressing the ENT button. code number of the desired language. the initial screen of the Language
Select other, and press the ENT menu.
The selectable languages are, button. The display changes as
English, French, Spanish, German, shown in the next column.
Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

249
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Audio Language

If you select Yes, the display If you made a mistake entering a You can select the dubbed language
changes to the language code input number digit, select DEL on the before playing DVDs.
mode. Select the first number digit display with the , , , Select Audio Lang by pressing the
using the , , , or or button, and press the ENT or button. You will see the
button, and press the ENT button on the control panel. Then submenu next to Audio Lang.
button to enter it. Repeat this until all select and enter the correct number
four digits are filled. When the digit as described. The display Follow the same instructions you
fourth digit is entered, the cursor returns to the initial Language used to set the menu language.
automatically moves to ENT on the menu screen.
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

250
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Subtitle Language INITIAL SETTINGS (Others) Dynamic Range

Features
You can select the subtitle language When you select Others at the Dynamic Range reduces the
before playing DVDs. bottom of the INITIAL SETTINGS differences between the loud and
Select Subtitle Lang by pressing screen, the above menu appears on quiet sound levels throughout the
the or button. You will see the the screen. disc. When this is on, the louder
submenu next to the Subtitle Lang. sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

251
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Angle Mark

ANGLE MARK

When you select the Dynamic When you switch to another angle Select Angle Mark by pressing the
Range by pressing the or while playing a DVD, the angle mark or button. The above submenu
button, you will see the submenu is displayed in the upper right corner appears. If you want the angle mark
next to the Dynamic Range as of the screen. to be displayed, select ON with the
shown above. or button, and then press
You can set the system to display or the ENT button. The display returns
To turn Dynamic Range on or off, not display this angle mark. to the Others menu.
select ON or OFF by pressing
the or button, and then
press the ENT button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

252
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Parental Control Level

Features
When you select and enter Yes,
You can place an auditory restriction Select Parental Level by pressing the display changes as shown above.
by changing the parental control the or button. You will see the To change the level, you need to
level. The higher the level number, submenu shown above. If you select enter your four digit password.
the lower the restriction. No, and press the ENT button, the Select the number for the first digit
display returns to the Others menu. by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ENT on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel. CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

253
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Changing the Password

If the system does not recognize the If you enter the password correctly, The password was set to 1111
password you entered, you will see you can then change the parental when the vehicle left the factory.
the above display. Repeat the control level.
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password. Once you correctly enter the
password, press the or button
to change the level, and then press
the ENT button to enter your
selection.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

254
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features
To change the password, select Select the first digit by pressing the If the system does not recognize the
Password. You will see the above , , , or button, password you entered, you will see
menu displayed. Select Yes by and enter it by pressing the ENT the above display. Repeat the
pressing the or button, button. Repeat this until all four password setting steps until you
then press the ENT button. digits are entered. When you enter enter the correct password.
the fourth number, the cursor
If you select No, and press the automatically moves to ENT on the
ENT button, the display returns to display. Press the ENT button on the
the Others menu. control panel.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

255
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

If you forget the password, select The display changes as shown above.
Password, and press the button If you want to use the default
10 times. password (1111), select Yes, and
press the ENT button.

The message Default password


setting applied is displayed for
5 seconds.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

256
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Remote Control Replacing the Remote Control As required by the FCC: This device
Batteries complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
RELEASE BUTTON Operation is subject to the following two
COVER conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Features
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
authority to operate the equipment.

The rear control panel can be This device complies with Industry
detached from the ceiling unit and If it takes several pushes on the Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
used as a remote control. To remove button to operate the rear subject to the following two conditions:
it from the ceiling unit, press the entertainment system, have your (1) this device may not cause
release button. The control panel will dealer replace the batteries as soon interference, and (2) this device must
swing down partway. Pivot it down as possible. accept any interference that may cause
further past the detent until it undesired operation of the device.
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall Battery type: BR3032
it, reverse the procedure.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

257
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Playable DVDs Those packages or jackets should


also bear the designation of 1 or
ALL. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.

Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
Protecting Your CDs on page 221 .

There are various types of DVDs


available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.

The DVD player in your rear


entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

258
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

DVD Player Error Messages


If you see an error message in the Message Solution
screen while operating the DVD
player, find the cause in the chart to ERROR F0 Eject the disc and reinsert it.
the right. If you cannot clear the ERROR F2
message, take your vehicle to a Invalid region code Use a disc with the regional designation of 1 or All.
dealer. Invalid disc The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc
compatible with this system.

Features
Parental control active. Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (see
Change level to view. pages 253 and 254 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

259
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Wireless Headphones The audio for the rear entertainment Replacing Batteries
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
VOLUME quality and range.
DIAL TAB
To use the headphones, pivot the
Some state and local government earpieces outward. This turns them Each headphone uses one AAA
agencies prohibit the use of on. To adjust the volume, turn the battery. The battery is under the
headphones by the driver of a motor dial on the bottom of the right cover on the left earpiece. To
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws earpiece. When you remove the remove the cover, insert a coin in the
and regulations. headphones, the earpieces slot and twist it slightly to pry the
automatically pivot inward, and the cover away from the earpiece. Pull
headphones turn off. When not in the cover outward, and pivot it out of
use, store the headphones in the the way.
pocket of either front seat.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

260
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Auxiliary Input Jacks


COVER ARMREST LEVER

Features
BATTERY AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

Remove the battery. Install the new Auxiliary input jacks and headphone The system will accept auxiliary
battery in the earpice as shown in connectors for the rear inputs from standard video games
the diagram next to the battery slot. entertainment system are under the and video equipment.
Slide the cover back into place on the third seat armrest on the drivers Some video game power supplies
earpiece, then press down on the side. To access these connectors, may cause poor picture quality.
back edge to lock it in place. open the cover by pulling up on the
lever. V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

261
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

There are three headphone


connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

262
Main Menu Table of Contents

Security System

On EX and Touring models The security system will not set if


The security system helps to protect the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
your vehicle and valuables from theft. fully closed. If the system will not set,
The horn sounds and a combination check the Door and Tailgate Open
of headlights, parking lights, side Monitor on the instrument panel
marker lights and taillights flashes if (see page 67 ), to see if the doors
someone attempts to break into your and the tailgate are fully closed.
vehicle or remove the radio. This Since it is not part of the monitor

Features
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then display, manually check the hood.
the alarm stops. To reset an
alarming system before the 2 SECURITY SYSTEM Do not attempt to alter this system
minutes have elapsed, unlock either INDICATOR or add other devices to it.
front door with the key or the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
The security system automatically hood without using the key or the
sets 15 seconds after you lock the remote transmitter, will cause it to
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
system to activate, you must lock the removed from the dashboard or the
doors and the tailgate from the wiring is cut.
outside with the key, the lock tab,
the door lock switch, or the remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator in the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

263
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) SET button on the steering wheel.
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
accelerator pedal. It should be used on the instrument panel comes on
for cruising on straight, open to show the system is now
highways. It is not recommended for activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
Improper use of cruise control CANCEL DECEL/SET RES/ACCEL slow down to the desired speed. This
can lead to a crash. BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON will cancel cruise control. To resume
the set speed, press the RES/
Use cruise control only when 1. Push the CRUISE button on the ACCEL button. The CRUISE
traveling on open highways in steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the
good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument instrument panel comes on.
panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising automatic transmission may
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). downshift to hold the set speed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

264
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set speed in Even with cruise control turned on,
You can increase the set speed in any of these ways: you can still use the accelerator
any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the DECEL/SET completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. will return to the set speed.
desired speed, release the button.
To slow down in very small Resting your foot on the brake pedal

Features
Push the accelerator pedal, amounts, tap the DECEL/SET causes cruise control to cancel.
accelerate to the desired speed, button repeatedly. Each time you
and press the DECEL/SET button. do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/ Tap the brake pedal lightly with
ACCEL button. Each time you do your foot. The CRUISE
this, your vehicle will speed up CONTROL indicator on the
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). instrument panel goes out. When
the vehicle slows to the desired
speed, press the DECEL/SET
button.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

265
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed


When you push the CANCEL button
CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then
press and release the RES/ACCEL
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator comes on. The vehicle
accelerates to the same speed as
before.

CANCEL BUTTON Pressing the CRUISE button turns


the system completely off and erases
You can cancel cruise control in any the previous set speed.
of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the


steering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on the


steering wheel.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

266
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

On EX and Touring models that causes the motor to stop and Training HomeLink
The HomeLink Universal reverse if an obstacle is detected Before you begin If you just
Transceiver built into your vehicle during closing, increasing the risk of received your vehicle and have not
can be programmed to operate up to injury. trained any of the buttons in
three remote controlled devices HomeLink before, you should erase
around your home, such as garage Important Safety Precautions any previously learned codes before
doors, lighting, or home security Always refer to the opening training the first button.
systems. instructions and safety information

Features
that came with your garage door To do this, press and hold the two
General Information opener or other equipment you outside buttons on the HomeLink
If you are training HomeLink to intend to operate with HomeLink. If Transceiver for about 20 seconds, or
operate a garage door or gate, you you do not have this information, until the red indicator flashes.
should unplug the motor for that contact the manufacturer of the Release the buttons, then go to step
device during training. Repeatedly equipment. 1.
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor. If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicles battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

267
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

3. Press and hold the remote control 6. Plug in the garage door opener
button and one of the HomeLink motor, then test the HomeLink
buttons at the same time. button by pushing it. If the button
does not work, repeat the
procedure to train it again. If it still
does not work, you may have a
The remote control you are training variable or rolling code garage
f rom may stop transmitting af ter 2 door opener. See if you do by
seconds. This is not enough f or pressing and holding the
HomeLink to learn the code. Release HomeLink button you just trained.
and press the button on the remote If the red indicator blinks for 2
control every 2 seconds until HomeLink seconds then stays on, you have a
has learned the code. rolling code garage door opener.
1. Unplug the garage door opener Go to Training with a Rolling
motor from the house current. 4. The red indicator in HomeLink Code System (see page 269 ).
should begin flashing. It will flash
2. Hold the end of the garage door slowly at first, then rapidly. 7. Repeat these steps to train the
opener remote control 2 to 5 other two HomeLink buttons to
inches from HomeLink. Make 5. When the red indicator flashes operate any other remotely
sure you are not blocking your rapidly, release both buttons. controlled devices around your
view of the red indicator in HomeLink should have learned home (lighting, automatic gate,
HomeLink. the code from the remote control. security system, etc.).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

268
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a rolling 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may

Features
door opener. require you to press the button up
to three times.)
The Training HomeLink
procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again.
proper garage door opener code. It should operate the garage door.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the Training complete the following steps.
HomeLink procedure.

2. Find the Training button on your


garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

269
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Erasing Codes Customer Assistance As required by the FCC:


To erase the codes stored in all three If you have problems with training This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red or would like information on home following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then products that can be operated by may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On (2) this device must accept any
the Internet, go to interference received, including
You should erase all three codes www.homelink.com. interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. operation.
HomeLink is a registered
Retraining a Button trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. Changes or modifications not expressly
To train an already programmed approved by the party responsible for
HomeLink button with a new device, compliance could void the users
you do not have to erase all the authority to operate the equipment.
memory. Train the selected button
over the existing memory code This device complies with Industry
following the steps under Training Canada Standard RSS-210.
HomeLink. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

270
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Sensor System

On Touring model
Your vehicle has a parking sensor
system. The system lets you know
the approximate distance between
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearing an obstacle, you will hear

Features
beeping and see parking messages in
the multi-information display.
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM BUTTON

To activate the system, push the The system has two front corner
button on the dashboard with the sensors, two rear corner sensors,
ignition in the ON (II) position. The and a rear center sensor.
indicator in the button comes on The rear center sensor works only
when the system is on. To turn the when the shift lever is in Reverse (R),
system off, push the button again. and the vehicle speed is less than 5
mph (8 km/h).
All obstacles may not always be
sensed. Even when the system is on, The corner sensors work only when
you should look for obstacles near the shift lever is in any position other
your vehicle to make sure it is safe to than P and the vehicle speed is less
park. than 5 mph (8 km/h).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

271
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Sensor System

Multi-Information Display Corner Sensor Operation


Messages and Beeper Operation Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle
When you turn the system on, all
indicators come on in the multi- About 16-20 in About 12-16 in About 12 in
information display, and a beeper (40-50 cm) (30-40 cm) (30 cm) or less
sounds once.

When the system senses an obstacle, Distance


the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.

Upper left Upper left Upper left


indicator stays on indicator stays on indicator stays on

Indicators
and
Messages

Continuous
Beeper Short beeps Very short beeps
beep

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

272
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Sensor System

Rear Center Sensor Operation

About 40-70 in About 24-40 in About 24 in


(1-1.8 m) (0.6-1 m) (0.6 m) or less

Distance

Features
Bottom Bottom Bottom If the system develops a problem,
indicator stays on indicator stays on indicator stays on you will see a CHECK PARKING
SENSOR SYSTEM message in the
Indicators multi-information display, and a
and beeper sounds continuously. Very
Messages often, a sensor covered with mud, ice,
snow, etc. is the cause of this
message. Check the sensors first. If
the message stays on or the beeper
does not stop, have the system
Continuous checked by your dealer.
Beeper Short beeps Very short beeps
beeps
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

273
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Sensor System

After the vehicle has been sitting


out in hot or cold weather.
When the system is affected by
some electrical equipment or
devices generating an ultrasonic
wave.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather.

The system may not sense thin or


low objects, or sonic-absorptive
Within about 20 in (50 cm) Within about 70 in (1.8 m) materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
The range of the corner sensors and Do not put any accessories on or
the rear center sensor are limited. around the sensors. The system cannot sense objects
Each corner sensor is capable of directly under the bumper.
sensing an obstacle only when your The system may not function
vehicle is 20 in (50 cm) or closer. properly under these conditions: Canadian Owners:
The rear center sensor senses an This device complies with Industry
obstacle that is behind your vehicle The sensors are covered with Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
70 in (1.8 m) or closer. snow, ice, mud, etc. subject to the following two conditions:
When the vehicle is on a rough (1) this device may not cause
road, on grass, or on a hill. interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

274
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear View Camera and Monitor

On EX with Leather and Touring When in reverse, the touch screen


models and Navi hard buttons are locked
out, except the ZOOM button.
Touching the or button
allows you to adjust the brightness of
the rear view camera image.

Features
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.

Since the rear view camera display


area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
Whenever you shift to R (Reverse) look behind you for obstacles.
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep the


rear view camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

275
Main Menu

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

276
Main Menu

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Break-in period............................... 278


vehicle, you should know what Gasoline Type ................................ 278
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 279
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 279
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 280
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 281
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 282
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 283
read the information in this section Improving Fuel Economy ......... 283

Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 284
Carrying Cargo .............................. 286

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

277
Main Menu Table of Contents

Break-in Period, Gasoline Type

Break-in Period Gasoline Type your dealer for service.


Help assure your vehicles future Your vehicle is designed to operate
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump Some gasoline today is blended with
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 86 or higher. Use oxygenates such as ethanol or
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping operate on oxygenated gasoline
noise that can lead to engine damage. containing up to 10 percent ethanol
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid by volume and up to 15 percent
acceleration. We recommend quality gasolines MTBE by volume. Do not use
containing detergent additives that gasoline containing methanol.
Avoid hard braking for the first help prevent fuel system and engine
200 miles (300 km). deposits. If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
Do not change the oil until the In addition, in order to maintain good service station or switch to another
scheduled maintenance time. performance, fuel economy, and brand of gasoline.
emissions control, we strongly
Do not tow a trailer. recommend, in areas where it is For further important fuel-related
available, the use of gasoline that information, please refer to your
You should also follow these does NOT contain manganese-based Quick Start Guide.
recommendations with an fuel additives such as MMT.
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced. Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

278
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures

Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.


You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes. Gasoline is highly flammable
The fuel fill cap is attached to the and explosive. You can be
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the burned or seriously injured
attachment on the fuel fill cap into when handling fuel.
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop the engine, and keep
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel heat, sparks, and flame away.
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do Handle fuel only outdoors.

Before Driving
not try to top off the tank. Leave Wipe up spills immediately.
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.

1. Park with the drivers side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even
to the service station pump. though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with your vehicles fuel
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling vapor recovery system. The system
on the handle under the lower left helps keep fuel vapors from going
corner of the dashboard. into the atmosphere. Consult your
dealer.
Before refueling, make sure the rear
sliding door on the drivers side is FUEL FILL CAP
closed.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

279
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
cap, the malfunction indicator
lamp may come on (see page 372 ).
On the Touring model, you will
also see a CHECK FUEL CAP
message on the multi-information
display.

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until


it latches.
LATCH

1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood. The hood latch
release handle located under the handle is above the H logo. Pull
lower left corner of the dashboard. up on this handle until it releases
The hood will pop up slightly. the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,


or you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

280
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check
SUPPORT ROD

Before Driving
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK

3. Pull the support rod out of its clip Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
and insert the end into the hole on engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be
the passengers side of the hood. between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark,
hole. Put the support rod back into cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 328 .
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

281
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owners Maintenance


Checks on page 323 for information
MAX RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.

MIN

Look at the coolant level in the


radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 331 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

282
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy Try to maintain a constant speed.


Always maintain your vehicle Every time you slow down and
according to the maintenance speed up, your vehicle uses extra
messages. See Owners fuel. Use cruise control when
Maintenance Checks (page 323 ). appropriate.

For example, an underinflated tire Combine several short trips into


causes more rolling resistance, one.
which uses more fuel.
The air conditioning puts an extra

Before Driving
The build-up of snow or mud on load on the engine which makes it
your vehicles underside adds use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
weight and rolling resistance. ventilation when possible.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapid


acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear


possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

283
Main Menu Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:


some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
be sure to read the following vehicles handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 376 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owners manual regarding the proper operation of your
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any electronic
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular accessory, have the installer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and contact your dealer. If possible,
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should have your dealer inspect the final
could adversely affect your vehicles not interfere with your vehicles installation.
handling and stability (see page 285 ). computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

284
Main Menu Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires


Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicles anti-lock brakes and
non-Honda components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicles
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicles
Some examples are: safety systems could make the
Lowering the vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
Honda suspension kit that

Before Driving
significantly reduces ground See Additional Safety Precautions
clearance can allow the on page 35 .
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which If you plan to modify your vehicle,
could cause the airbags to deploy. consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a


non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because they


are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

285
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Your vehicle has several convenient


SEAT-BACK POCKETS
storage areas:
REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

UPPER GLOVE
Glove box (upper and lower)
REMOVABLE
SECOND ROW BOX In-floor storage (with Lazy
CONSOLE Susan)
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second row seats when removed,
and the third row seat when folded
flat
Removable second row console
Center pocket
Rear compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,


CENTER or improperly storing it, can affect
POCKET your vehicles handling, stability,
IN-FLOOR STORAGE
stopping distance, and tires, and
(with Lazy Susan) make it unsafe. Before carrying any
SEAT-BACK POCKET LOWER
type of cargo, be sure to read the
CARGO AREA GLOVE BOX following pages.

: Touring model only


: EX and Touring models only
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

286
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

The maximum load for your vehicle 3. Subtract the combined weight of 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
is: the driver and passengers from trailer, the load from your trailer
LX model: 1,349 lbs (612 kg) the maximum load. will be transferred to your vehicle.
EX model: 1,388 lbs (630 kg) Consult this manual to determine
EX with Leather: 1,322 lbs (600 kg) 4. The resulting figure equals the how this reduces the available
Touring model: 1,208 lbs (548 kg) available amount of cargo and cargo and luggage load capacity of
luggage load capacity. your vehicle.
This figure includes, cargo,
accessories, and the tongue weight if For example, If your vehicle is the
you are towing a trailer. Touring model, and if there will be

Before Driving
five 150 lbs (70 kg) occupants in Overloading or improper
To determine the correct cargo and your vehicle, the amount of available loading can affect handling and
luggage load limit: cargo and luggage load capacity is stability and cause a crash in
458 lbs (198 kg). which you can be hurt or killed.
1. Locate the statement, the 5 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs
combined weight of occupants and (350 kg) Follow all load limits and other
cargo should never exceed 1,208 1,208 lbs (548 kg) 750 lbs (350 kg) loading guidelines in this
lbs (548 kg) on your vehicles = 458 lbs (198 kg) manual.
placard (on the drivers doorjamb)
if your vehicle is the Touring 5. Determine the combined weight
model, for example. of accessories, luggage, and cargo
being loaded in the vehicle. The
2. Determine the combined weight weight may not safely exceed the
of the driver and passengers that available cargo and luggage load
will be riding in your vehicle. capacity calculated in step 4
[458 lbs (198 kg) in this example].
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

287
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area If you carry any items on a roof
Compartment or on a Roof Rack rack, be sure the total weight of
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the the rack and the items does not
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the exceed 150 lb (68 kg).
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie If you use an accessory roof rack,
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown the roof rack weight limit may be
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or lower. Refer to the information that
under the seats and interfere with sudden stop. came with your roof rack.
the pedals or seat operation.
If you carry large items that
Keep the glove boxes closed while prevent you from closing the
driving. If either are open, a tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger could be injured during passenger area. To avoid the
a crash or sudden stop. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 56 .

If you place items near the rear


windows, be sure they are below
the bottom of the windows. If
cargo is higher, it could interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

288
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Cargo Net Cargo Hooks

Before Driving
CARGO HOOKS

On EX and Touring models There are cargo hooks for plastic


You can use the cargo net to secure grocery bags on the back of the third
items in the cargo area, and store row seat. They are designed to hold
small items between the two halves light items. Heavy objects may
of the net. To install the cargo net, damage the hooks.
hook the loops on the four corners of
the net to the tabs at both sides of
the tailgate sill.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

289
Main Menu

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

290
Main Menu

Driving

This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 292


starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 293
conditions, and how to operate the Automatic Transmission............... 294
automatic transmission. It also Parking Tips ................................... 298
includes important information on Braking System.............................. 299
parking your vehicle, the braking Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 300
system, the vehicle stability assist Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
system, the tire pressure monitoring System......................................... 301
system, and facts you need if you are Tire Pressure Monitoring System
planning to tow a trailer. (TPMS) ....................................... 303
Towing a Trailer ............................ 306

Driving
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

291
Main Menu Table of Contents

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 149 ).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 167 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 127 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
8. Make sure the doors and the
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire tailgate are securely closed and
looks low, use a gauge to check its locked.
pressure.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Check that any items you may be your passengers have fastened
carrying are stored properly or their seat belts (see page 16 ).
fastened down securely.
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 61 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

292
Main Menu Table of Contents

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press
pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold down and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce the key in START for more than starting to clear flooding. If the
the drain on the battery. 15 seconds at a time. If the engine engine still does not start, return
does not start right away, pause to step 5.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in for at least 10 seconds before
Park. Press on the brake pedal. trying again.

The engine is harder to start in cold


weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
The immobilizer system protects your altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400

Driving
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- meters) adds to this problem.
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engines f uel system is disabled. See
Immobilizer System on page 129 .

5. If the engine does not start within


15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

293
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp Shifting


comes on along with the D
indicator, there is a problem in the RELEASE BUTTON
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

D3 BUTTON SHIFT LEVER

These indicators on the instrument To shift from any position, press


panel show which position the shift firmly on the brake pedal and press
lever is in. the release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
The D indicator comes on for a Park when the ignition switch is in
few seconds when you turn the the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
ignition switch to ON (II). If it position.
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

294
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

To shift from: Do this: Park (P) This position mechani- Neutral (N) Use Neutral if you
P to R Press the brake pedal, and cally locks the transmission. Use need to restart a stalled engine, or if
press the release button. Park whenever you are turning off or it is necessary to stop briefly with
R to P starting the engine. To shift out of the engine idling. Shift to the Park
N to R Press the release button. Park, you must press on the brake position if you need to leave your
D3 to 2 pedal and have your foot off the vehicle for any reason. Press on the
2 to 1 accelerator pedal. Press the release brake pedal when you are moving
1 to 2 button on the side of the shift lever the shift lever from Neutral to
2 to D to move it. another gear.
D to N Move the lever.
N to D If you have done all of the above and Drive (D) Use this position for
R to N still cannot move the lever out of normal driving. The transmission

Driving
D3 to D Press the D3 button. Park, see Shift Lock Release on automatically selects a suitable gear
D to D3 page 297 . for your speed and acceleration. You
may notice the transmission shifting
Reverse (R) Press the brake up at higher speeds when the engine
pedal and press the release button to is cold. This helps the engine warm
shift from Park to Reverse. To shift up faster.
from Reverse to Neutral, come to a
complete stop and then shift.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

295
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D3) To use D3, press the First (1) This position locks the Engine Speed Limiter
D3 button when the shift lever is in transmission in First gear. By upshift- If you exceed the maximum speed
the D position. This position is simi- ing and downshifting through 1, 2, for the gear you are in, the engine
lar to D, except only the first three and D, you can operate this speed will enter into the tachometers
gears are selected instead of all five. transmission much like a manual red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly transmission without a clutch pedal. the engine cut in and out. This is
terrain, or to provide engine braking caused by a limiter in the engines
when going down a steep hill. D3 can computer controls. The engine will
also keep the transmission from run normally when you reduce the
cycling between third and fourth RPM below the red zone.
gears in stop-and-go driving.

Second (2) This position locks


the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:


For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

296
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release 6. Remove the key from the shift


Do this if pushing on the brake pedal lock release slot, then install the
and pressing the release button does cover. Press the brake pedal, and
not shift the transmission out of restart the engine.
park:
If you need to use the shift lock
1. Set the parking brake. release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in checked by your dealer.
the LOCK (0) position.

Driving
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.

4. Insert the key in the shift lock


release slot.

5. Push down on the key while you


pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to Neutral.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

297
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking

Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof and the the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly or windows are closed. curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline. Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc. curb.
the transmission in Park. This keeps in the cargo area, or take them
the vehicle from moving and putting with you. Make sure the parking brake is
pressure on the parking mechanism fully released before driving away.
in the transmission. Lock the doors and the tailgate. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
Never park over dry leaves, tall damage the rear brakes.
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

298
Main Menu Table of Contents

Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power through deep water. Apply the If the brake pads need replacing, you
assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes moderately to see if they feel will hear a distinctive, metallic
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock normal. If not, apply them gently and screeching sound when you apply
brake system (ABS) helps you retain frequently until they do. Be extra the brake pedal. If you do not have
steering control when braking very cautious in your driving. the brake pads replaced, they will
hard. screech all the time. It is normal for
Braking System Design the brakes to occasionally squeal or
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps The hydraulic system that operates squeak when you apply them.
the brakes applied lightly, builds up the brakes has two separate circuits.
heat, and reduces their effectiveness. Each circuit works diagonally across
It also keeps your brake lights on all the vehicle (the left-front brake is

Driving
the time, confusing drivers behind connected with the right-rear brake,
you. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
Constant application of the brakes at two wheels.
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

299
Main Menu Table of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS Indicator Important Safety Reminders
helps prevent the brakes from ABS does not reduce the time or
locking up, and helps you retain ABS INDICATOR distance it takes to stop the
steering control by pumping the vehicle; it only helps with steering
brakes rapidly, much faster than a control during braking.
person can do it.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
You should never pump the brake pedal. results from changing direction
Let the ABS work for you by always abruptly, such as trying to take a
keeping firm, steady pressure on the corner too fast or making a sudden
brake pedal. This is sometimes lane change.
referred to as stomp and steer.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
You will feel a pulsation in the brake stability. Always steer moderately
pedal when the ABS activates, and If the ABS indicator comes on, the when you are braking hard. Severe
you may hear some noise. This is anti-lock function of the braking or sharp steering wheel movement
normal: it is the ABS rapidly system has shut down. The brakes can still cause your vehicle to veer
pumping the brakes. On dry still work like a conventional system, into oncoming traffic or off the road.
pavement, you will need to press on but without anti-lock. You should
the brake pedal very hard before the have your dealer inspect your vehicle A vehicle with ABS may require a
ABS activates. However, you may as soon as possible. longer distance to stop on loose or
feel the ABS activate immediately if uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
you are trying to stop on snow or ice. snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

300
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator On Touring model only
system helps to stabilize the vehicle You will also see a CHECK VSA
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the SYSTEM message on the multi-
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. information display if there is a
assists you in maintaining traction problem with the VSA system.
while accelerating on loose or VSA System Indicator
slippery road surfaces. It does this If the low tire pressure indicator
by regulating the engines output, If the VSA system indicator comes comes on (see page 66 ), or the
and by selectively applying the on while driving, pull to the side of multi-information display shows a
brakes. the road when it is safe, and turn off CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message
the engine. Reset the system by (see page 84 ), the VSA system
When VSA activates, you may notice restarting the engine. If the VSA automatically turns on even if you

Driving
that the engine does not respond to system indicator stays, or comes turn it off with the VSA OFF button.
the accelerator in the same way it back on while driving, have the VSA
does at other times. system inspected by your dealer.

The VSA system cannot enhance the If the indicator does not come on
vehicles driving stability in all when the ignition switch is turned to
situations and does not control your ON (II), there may be a problem
vehicles entire braking system. It is with the VSA system. Have your
still your responsibility to drive and dealer inspect your vehicle as soon
corner at reasonable speeds and to as possible.
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

301
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Without VSA, your vehicle still has VSA OFF Button VSA and Tire Sizes
normal braking and cornering ability, Driving with varying tire or wheel
but it does not have VSA traction and LX and EX models sizes may cause the VSA to
stability enhancement. malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
Touring model and type as your original tires (see
page 349 ).

Deactivate the VSA system if you


VSA OFF need to drive with the compact spare
SWITCH
tire installed (all models except U.S.
Touring).
VSA OFF SWITCH
If you install winter tires, make sure
This button is under the drivers side they are the same size as those that
vent. Press it to turn the VSA system were originally supplied with your
on or off. vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
When VSA is off, the VSA activation your vehicle was not equipped with
indicator comes on as a reminder. VSA.

VSA is turned on every time you


start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

302
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving
On U.S. Touring model only To see the inflation pressures of all Each tire has its own pressure
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire four tires, press the SEL/RESET sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) button on the steering wheel. The becomes significantly low, the
that turns on every time you start the display changes as shown above. sensor in that tire immediately sends
engine and monitors the pressure in a signal that causes the low tire
your tires while driving. pressure indicator in the instrument
panel to come on. If this happens,
You will see the above display on the you will see which tire is losing the
multi-information display when you pressure in the multi-information
turn the ignition switch to ON (II) display along with a CHECK TIRE
and press the INFO button on the PRESSURE message.
steering wheel six times.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

303
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure It is possible that the pressures


Indicator shown in the multi-information
When the low tire pressure indicator display and the pressures you
is on, one or more of your tires is manually measure are slightly
significantly under-inflated. You different.
should stop and check your tires as If the difference is significant and
soon as possible, and inflate them to you cannot make the low tire
the proper pressure as indicated on pressure indicator and message in
the vehicles tire information placard. the multi-information display go out
Driving on a significantly under- after inflating the tires to the
inflated tire causes the tire to specified values, have your dealer
overheat and can lead to tire failure. check the system as soon as possible.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may If a flat tire is causing the low tire
affect the vehicles handling and pressure indicator to come on, you
stopping ability. Each tire, including will see the above message in the
the spare should be checked multi-information display.
monthly when cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified in the vehicle placard and
owners manual (see page 346 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

304
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Because your vehicle is equipped TPMS System Failure If the low tire pressure indicator
with the Michelin PAX system, you comes on, or the multi-information
can continue to drive up to about 125 display shows a CHECK TPMS
miles (200 km). If you have a flat tire, SYSTEM message, the VSA system
take your vehicle to the nearest automatically turns on even when
Honda dealer or authorized Michelin the VSA system is turned off by
PAX system dealer. pressing the VSA OFF button (see
page 301 ). If this happens, you
For more information on the cannot turn the VSA system off by
Michelin PAX system, refer to page pressing the VSA OFF button again.
356 .
Changing a Tire with TPMS

Driving
The tires on your vehicles are PAX
tires, and you cannot replace or
If there is a problem with the TPMS, repair a flat tire. Replacement or
you will see the above message in repair of tires must be performed by
the multi-information display. a Honda dealer or an authorized
Michelin PAX system dealer.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

305
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits


primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.

Exceeding any load limit or


improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed. Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that
maximum allowable weight of the the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
Check the loading of your trailer and everything in or on it puts on the hitch should be
vehicle and trailer carefully depends on several factors. See approximately 10 percent of the
before starting to drive. page 307 for the driving limits for total trailer weight. Too much
your towing situation. Towing a tongue load reduces front-tire
load that is too heavy can seriously traction and steering control. Too
affect your vehicles handling and little tongue load can make the
performance. It can also damage trailer unstable and cause it to
the engine and drivetrain. sway.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

306
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Maximum Total Trailer Weight Gross Vehicle Weight Rating


Number of Equipped with transmission cooler (GVWR):
Occupants1 and power steering fluid cooler2 The maximum allowable weight of
1 3,500 lbs (1,580 kg) the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
2 3,350 lbs (1,520 kg) and the tongue load is 5,952 lbs
3 3,200 lbs (1,450 kg) (2,700 kg).
4 3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)
5 2,900 lbs (1,310 kg) Gross Axle Weight Rating
6 2,750 lbs (1,250 kg) (GAWR):
7 2,600 lbs (1,180 kg)3 1,550 lbs (700 kg)4 The maximum allowable weight of
83 650 lbs (290 kg) the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not

Driving
1: Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant. exceed 2,833 lbs (1,285 kg) on the
2: See page 309 for information about fluid coolers. front axle, and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg)
3: LX and EX models on the rear axle.
4: Touring model
Gross Combined Weight Rating
To achieve a proper tongue load, (GCWR):
start by loading 60 percent of the The maximum allowable weight of
load toward the front of the trailer the fully loaded vehicle and trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then is 8,410 lbs (3,815 kg) (see page
re-adjust the load as needed. 386 ).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

307
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Weight Distributing Hitch


The best way to confirm that vehicle Accessories If the total trailer weight is more
and trailer weights are within limits Towing generally requires a variety than 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you must
is to have them checked at a public of supplemental equipment, also use a weight distributing hitch.
scale. depending on the size of your trailer, This device transfers weight from
how much load you are towing, and the vehicles rear wheels to the front
Using a suitable scale or a special where you tow. To ensure the best wheels, and to the trailers wheels.
tongue load gauge, check the tongue quality, we recommend that you Carefully follow the hitch makers
load the first time you set up a purchase Honda equipment instructions for proper installation
towing combination (a fully-loaded whenever possible. and adjustment.
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions Discuss your needs with your trailer Safety Chains
change. sales or rental agency, and follow the Always use safety chains when you
guidelines in this section. Also make tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
sure that all equipment is properly are secured to the trailer and hitch,
installed and meets federal, state, and that they cross under the tongue
province, and local regulations. and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
Hitches slack to allow the trailer to turn
Any hitch used on your vehicle must corners easily, but do not let the
be properly bolted to the underbody, chains drag on the ground.
using the six threaded holes
provided. A hitch and the required
fluid coolers designed especially for
your Odyssey can be obtained from
your Honda dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

308
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Sway Control Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights


If the total trailer weight exceeds Honda recommends that any trailer Trailer lights and equipment must
2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should install having a total weight of 1,000 lbs comply with federal, state, province,
a sway control device to minimize (450 kg) or more be equipped with and local regulations. Check the
swaying that can occur in crosswinds its own electric or surge-type brakes. requirements for the areas where
and in normal and emergency you plan to tow, and use only
driving maneuvers. Your trailer If you choose electric brakes, be equipment designed for your vehicle.
maker can tell you what kind of sway sure they are electrically actuated.
control you need and how to install it. Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicles hydraulic system. No
Transmission Fluid Cooler and matter how successful it may seem,
Power Steering Fluid Cooler any attempt to attach trailer brakes

Driving
To help prevent overheating, a to your vehicles hydraulic system
transmission fluid cooler and a will lower braking effectiveness and
power steering fluid cooler are create a potential hazard.
required for trailer towing. These
coolers are available only from your See your trailer dealer for more
Honda dealer. information on installing electric
brakes.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

309
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

If you use a non-Honda trailer page 360 for information on


GROUND LEFT TURN SIGNAL
lighting harness and converter, you changing a flat tire.
SMALL LIGHTS can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your Remember to unhitch the trailer
vehicle from your dealer. before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
Since lighting and wiring vary by and how to store the trailers spare
trailer type and brand, you should tire.
RIGHT TURN have a qualified technician install a
SIGNAL suitable connector between the U.S. Touring model
B HAZARD B HAC vehicle and the trailer. Improper Because of the Michelin PAX system,
SMALL LIGHTS equipment or installation can cause you must not change a flat tire by
damage to your vehicles electrical yourself, or use a compact spare tire
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting system and affect your vehicle on your vehicle.
connector behind the right side warranty.
panel in the cargo area. Refer to the Additional Towing Equipment
drawing above for the purpose of Spare Tires Many states and provinces require
each pin. When towing a trailer, we special outside mirrors when towing
recommend that you carry a full-size a trailer. Even if they dont, you
To use the trailer lighting connector, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle should install special mirrors if you
you will need a wiring harness and and trailer. If you use the compact cannot clearly see behind you, or if
converter. This comes with the spare tire that came with your the trailer creates a blind spot.
Honda hitch (see page 308 ), or it vehicle, it could adversely affect Ask your trailer sales or rental
may be obtained separately from vehicle handling. See page 349 for agency if any other items are
your dealer. proper tire size, page 364 for how to recommended or required for your
store a full size wheel and tire, and towing situation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

310
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist All items in or on the trailer are Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before properly secured and cannot shift The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the while you drive. height of a trailer will affect your
following: vehicles handling and performance,
Your vehicle tires and spare are so driving with a trailer requires
The vehicle has been properly properly inflated, and the trailer some special driving skills and
serviced, and the tires, brakes, tires and spare are inflated as techniques.
suspension, cooling system, and recommended by the trailer
lights are in good operating maker. For your safety and the safety of
condition. others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
The trailer has been properly open road, and follow the guidelines

Driving
serviced and is in good condition. below.

All weights and loads are within Towing Speeds and Gears
limits. Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
The hitch, safety chains, and any speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
other attachments are secure. Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. Do not exceed
55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,
the trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

311
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill, Backing Up
Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake. Always drive slowly and have
than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in someone guide you when backing up.
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator, Grip the bottom of the steering
can hit or run over something the as this can cause the automatic wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
vehicle misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat. to get the trailer to move to the left,
distance for braking. Do not brake or and turn the wheel right to move the
turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce trailer to the right.
trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed, and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ride the brakes, and Parking
Driving on Hills remember, it will take longer to slow Follow all normal precautions when
When climbing hills, closely watch down and stop when towing a trailer. parking, including putting the
your temperature gauge. If it nears transmission in Park and firmly
the red mark, turn the air Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting setting the parking brake. Also, place
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Crosswinds and air turbulence wheel chocks at each of the trailers
necessary, pull to the side of the caused by passing trucks can disrupt tires.
road to let the engine cool. your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
If the automatic transmission shifts large vehicle, keep a constant speed,
frequently while going up a hill, shift and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to D3. to make quick steering or braking
corrections.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

312
Main Menu

Maintenance

This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 314


important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 315
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 325
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 327
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 328
This section also includes Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 329
instructions on how to read the Engine Coolant ............................... 331
maintenance messages in the Windshield Washers ..................... 333
odometer/trip meter display or Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 334
multi-Information display, a Brake Fluid ..................................... 335
maintenance record, and instructions Power Steering Fluid..................... 336
for simple maintenance tasks you Timing Belt ..................................... 336
may want to take care of yourself. Lights .............................................. 337
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 343

Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to Floor Mats ...................................... 343
perform more complex maintenance Wiper Blades .................................. 344
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Tires ................................................ 346
to purchase the service manual. See Checking the Battery .................... 352
page 401 for information on how to Vehicle Storage .............................. 353
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

313
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection, precautions can cause you to
and skills required. maintenance recommendations, be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked and schedules in this owners
on level ground, the parking brake manual. Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. and precautions in this owners
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially Potential Vehicle Hazards
available degreaser or parts Carbon Monoxide poison from
cleaner, not gasoline. engine exhaust. Be sure there is Some of the most important safety
adequate ventilation whenever you precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or operate the engine. we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

314
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Indicator
and maintenance service items in the On LX and EX models
odometer/trip meter display on the
LX and EX models, or in the multi-
information display on the Touring
model, to show you when you should
have your dealer perform engine oil
replacement and indicated
maintenance service.

Based on the engine operating


conditions and accumulated engine ENGINE OIL LIFE
revolutions, the onboard computer in MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
your vehicle calculates the remaining MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE

Maintenance
INDICATOR
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage. To see the current engine oil life, If the oil life is 15 percent or less,
turn the ignition switch to ON (II), you will see the oil life indicator for
and push and release the SELECT/ several seconds every time you turn
RESET knob on the instrument the ignition switch to ON (II). The
panel 3 times. maintenance minder indicator will
also come on, and the maintenance
item code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service
will be displayed next to the engine
oil life indicator.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

315
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

You can change the display to the


odometer, the trip meter, or the
outside temperature by pushing the
SELECT/RESET knob on the
instrument panel.

When the remaining engine oil life is When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see a 0 percent, you will see the above
CHANGE OIL message in the display. In this display, the remaining
odometer/trip meter display, along oil life indicator will be blinking. This
with the same maintenance item display comes on and stays on every
code(s), every time you turn the time you turn the ignition switch to
ignition switch to ON (II). ON (II). When you see this message,
have the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

316
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

On Touring model

MASTER WARNING INDICATOR

Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, When the remaining engine oil life is
If you still do not perform the turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 15 percent or less, the display shows
indicated maintenance, you will see a then push and release the a SERVICE DUE SOON message
negative mileage, for example SEL/RESET button on the steering along with the maintenance item
543, blinking in the display. This wheel three times. code(s) for other scheduled
negative mileage means that you maintenance items needing service.
should have performed the indicated
maintenance 543 miles ago. When you turn the ignition switch to
Immediately have the indicated ON (II), the master warning
maintenance done by your dealer. indicator will also come on.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

317
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

These messages will come on every


time you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II).

Immediately have the service


performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 320 .

You can change the display to the


odometer, the trip meter, or the
outside temperature by pushing the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel.

When the remaining engine oil life is When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the less than 0 percent and you have not
above display. The display then done the required maintenance, you
changes to SERVICE DUE NOW. will see the above display for several
Have the indicated maintenance seconds. In this display, 0 will be
done as soon as possible. blinking.

The display then changes to


SERVICE PAST DUE.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

318
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and Sub


Items
LX and EX models Touring model

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

Maintenance
If you still do not get the indicated
maintenance done, you will see a All the maintenance items displayed
negative mileage, for example 15 in the odometer/trip meter or the MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS
blinking. This negative mileage multi-information display are in code.
display means you should have done
the indicated maintenance 15 miles For an explanation of the
ago. Immediately have the indicated maintenance codes, see page 324 .
maintenance done by your dealer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

319
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil Life


Indicator
On LX and EX models
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
OIL LIFE 100% on the odometer/
trip meter display the next time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

If maintenance service is done by


someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows: 3. Press the SELECT/RESET knob 4. Press the SELECT/RESET knob
for about 10 seconds. The engine for more than 5 seconds. The
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). oil life and the maintenance item maintenance items code(s) will
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life
2. Press the SELECT/RESET knob will reset to 100.
until the engine oil life indicator is
displayed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

320
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

On Touring model
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

2. Press the SEL/RESET button on


the steering wheel until the engine
oil life is displayed.

3. Press the SEL/RESET knob in the 5. If you want to cancel resetting,

Maintenance
instrument panel for about 10 press the INFO button on the
seconds. The display will change steering wheel. The display
to the CUSTOM SETUP mode. changes as shown. Press the SEL/
RESET button. This cancels the
4. Press the SEL/RESET button on resetting procedure, and the
the steering wheel. The screen returns to the normal
maintenance item code(s) will display mode.
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to 100.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

321
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not


Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
Your authorized Honda dealer warranty booklet for more
6. When you select RESET and knows your vehicle best and can information.
press the SEL/RESET button, the provide competent, efficient service.
multi-information display resets as We recommend the use of Honda
shown above. parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

322
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

U.S. Vehicles: Owners Maintenance Checks Lights Check the operation of


Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 337 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are certified to EPA
standards. Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 281 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level Check the
with will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 282 .

Maintenance
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission Check
intervals indicated by the odometer/ the fluid level monthly. See page
trip meter display or the multi- 334 .
information display.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 335 .

Tires Check the tire pressure


monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
347 .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

323
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items


A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Rotate tires If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
Inspect front and rear brakes every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Check parking brake adjustment Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect these items: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
Suspension components from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
Driveshaft boots miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) Inspect drive belt


All fluid levels and condition of fluids 3 Replace transmission fluid
Exhaust system Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
Fuel lines and connections speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission temperatures.
1 : If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months This requires transmission fluid changes more
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regulary drive your vehicle under these
: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
on page 323 . every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
4 Replace spark plugs
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under-20F,
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. 29C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada)
Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

324
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Record

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle.

Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature


Performed Performed
Date Date

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

325
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Record

Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature


Performed Performed
Date Date

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

326
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fluid Locations

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID


(Orange loop) (Gray cap)

Maintenance
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE OIL FILL CAP


RESERVOIR
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

327
Main Menu Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
engines performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make
Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says
the oil is energy conserving, and that For Gasoline Engines.
it meets the American Petroleum
Institutes latest requirements. The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the containers label.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy.
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap, and


tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you Ambient Temperature
could damage the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

328
Main Menu Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter


You may use a synthetic motor oil if Always change the oil and filter
it meets the same requirements according to the maintenance
given for a conventional motor oil: it messages shown on the odometer/
displays the API Certification Seal, trip meter display or on the multi-
and it is the proper weight. You must information display. The oil and filter
follow the oil and filter change collect contaminants that can dam-
intervals shown on the odometer/ age your engine if they are not
trip meter display or on the multi- removed regularly.
information display.
Changing the oil and filter requires
Engine Oil Additives special tools and access from DRAIN BOLT WASHER
Your vehicles engine does not underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
require any oil additives. Additives should be raised on a service station- 2. Open the hood, and remove the

Maintenance
may adversely affect engine or type hydraulic lift for this service. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
transmission performance and Unless you have the knowledge and drain bolt and washer from the
durability. proper equipment, you should have bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled into an appropriate container.
mechanic.

1. Run the engine until it reaches


normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

329
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing the Oil and Filter

OIL FILTER 6. Refill the engine with the


recommended oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
Engine oil change capacity harmf ul to the environment. If you
(including filter): change your own oil, please dispose of
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
Start the engine. The oil pressure or dump it on the ground.
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.

3. Remove the oil filter, and let the 8. Let the engine run for several
remaining oil drain. A special minutes, then check the drain bolt
wrench (available from your and oil filter for leaks.
dealer) is required.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
4. Install a new oil filter according to for several minutes, then check
the instructions that come with it. the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

330
Main Menu Table of Contents

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda All Season If the reserve tank is completely
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This empty, you should also check the
RESERVE TANK coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.

Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to between the malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the system flushed and refilled with
cooling system for leaks. Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

331
Main Menu Table of Contents

Engine Coolant

4. Put the radiator cap back on, and


tighten it fully.

5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.


Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or


other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK engine components.

1. When the radiator and engine are 3. The coolant level should be up to
cool, relieve any pressure in the the base of the filler neck. Add
cooling system by turning the coolant if it is low.
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down. Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any spill
2. Remove the radiator cap by immediately; it could damage
pushing down and turning components in the engine
counterclockwise. compartment.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

332
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Washers

Check the fluid level in the On Canadian models: The low washer
windshield washer reservoir at least level indicator comes on when the
monthly during normal use. This level is low (see page 69 ).
reservoir supplies the windshield and
rear window washers. On the Touring model: You will see a
WASHER FLUID LOW message
Check the fluid level by removing on the multi-information display
the cap and looking at the level when the level is low.
gauge attached to the cap.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.

Maintenance
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper Do not use engine antif reeze or a
blades with windshield washer fluid vinegar/water solution in the
on a clean cloth. This will help to windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
condition them. can damage your vehicles paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

333
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level with the engine 5. If the level is below the lower
at normal operating temperature. DIPSTICK mark, remove the fill plug, and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
UPPER MARK compartment.
LOWER MARK Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
its not available, you may use a
3. Insert the dipstick, all the way into DEXRON III automatic
the transmission as shown. transmission fluid as a temporary
DIPSTICK replacement. However, continued
4. Remove the dipstick, and check use can affect the shift quality.
the fluid level. It should be Have the transmission flushed and
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) between the upper and lower refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
from the transmission, and wipe it marks. soon as it is convenient.
with a clean cloth.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

334
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid

To thoroughly flush the transmission, Brake Fluid Always use Honda Heavy Duty
the technician should drain and refill Check the brake fluid level in the Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the reservoirs monthly. available, you should use only DOT 3
vehicle for a short distance. Do this Replace the brake fluid according to or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
three times. Then drain and refill the the time recommendations in the container, as a temporary
transmission a final time. maintenance minder schedule. replacement.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way back MIN Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
into the transmission securely as cause corrosion and decrease the life
shown in the illustration. of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
The transmission should be drained Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
and refilled with new fluid when this DOT 3 as soon as possible.
service is indicated on a maintenance

Maintenance
message on the odometer/trip meter Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
display or on the multi-information you do not spill any. Clean up any
display. spills immediately; it could damage
MAX components in the engine
If you are not sure how to add fluid, compartment.
contact your dealer. The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
of the reservoir. If the level is at or compatible with your vehicles
below the MIN mark, your brake braking system and can cause
system needs attention. Have the extensive damage.
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

335
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Power Steering Fluid Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency at the intervals shown in the
replacement, but have the power maintenance minder schedule.
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. Replace the belt at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km) if you regularly drive
A low power steering fluid level can your vehicle in one or more of these
indicate a leak in the system. Check conditions:
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as In very high temperatures
possible. (over 110F, 43C).
LOWER LEVEL In very low temperatures
(under 20F, 29C).
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold. Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
The fluid should be between the or right lock and holding it there can
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. damage the power steering pump.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so


you do not spill. Clean up any spill
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

336
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb


The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs, two on each side. When
regularly carry heavy items in the replacing a bulb, handle it by its base
cargo area or pull a trailer, and protect the glass from contact
readjustment may be required. with your skin or hard objects. If you
Adjustments should be done by your touch the glass, clean it with
dealer or other qualified mechanic. denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot


when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to The high beam headlight bulb and

Maintenance
overheat and shatter. the low beam headlight bulb are
replaced the same way.

1. Open the hood. To change the


high beam headlight bulb on the
passengers side, remove the
power steering fluid reservoir
from its holder by pulling it
straight up.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

337
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

TAB 5. Push the electrical connector back Replacing a Front Turn Signal
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on Bulb
all the way.

6. Turn on the headlights to test the


new bulb.

7. If you replaced the high beam


headlight bulb on the passengers
side, reinstall the power steering
fluid reservoir.

2. Remove the electrical connector


from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector 1. Open the hood. Remove the
down. socket from the headlight
assembly by turning it one-quarter
3. Remove the bulb by turning it one- turn counterclockwise.
quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Pull the burned out bulb straight
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole, out of its socket.
and turn it one-quarter turn clock- Push the new bulb straight into
wise to lock it in place. the socket until it bottoms.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

338
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

3. Insert the socket back into the Replacing a Front Parking/Side 3. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it Marker Bulb headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. clockwise to lock it in place.

4. Turn on the lights to make sure 4. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working. the new bulb is working.

Maintenance
1. Open the hood. Remove the
socket from the headlight
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of its


socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

339
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb 5. Insert the new bulb into the
Touring model only assembly and turn it one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.

6. Push the electrical connector onto


the new bulb.

7. Turn on the fog lights to test the


new bulb.

8. Reinstall the fog light assembly


into the bumper. Tighten the
mounting bolt.

1. Use a wrench to remove the 3. Remove the electrical connector


mounting bolt from the underbody from the bulb by pushing on the
through the hole in the splash tab and pulling the connector
shield. down.

2. Remove the fog light assembly 4. Remove the bulb from the fog
from the bumper by pulling its light assembly by turning it one-
inner edge first, then the whole quarter turn counterclockwise.
assembly out of the bumper.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

340
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing a Rear Turn Signal or 6. Put the socket back into the light
Brake Light Bulb assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.

7. Install the rear light assembly in


the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts. Snap the bolt covers into
position.

Maintenance
1. Remove the two bolt covers on the 3. Remove the socket by turning it
rear pillar by prying on the bottom one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
edge with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Remove the bolts with a Phillips- 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
head screwdriver, and remove the straight out of its socket.
light assembly from the rear pillar. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
2. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: turn signal or 5. Test the lights to make sure the
brake/taillight. new bulb is working.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

341
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing a Taillight or Back-up 5. Test the lights to make sure the


Light Bulb new bulb is working.

6. Reinstall the light cover.

1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on 3. Remove the socket from the light
the edge of the middle of the light assembly by turning it one-quarter
cover. turn counterclockwise.
Remove the cover by carefully
prying on its edge. 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push a new bulb into the
2. Determine which bulb is burned socket until it bottoms. Reinstall
out: taillight or back-up light. the assembly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

342
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
LOOP can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.

Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The drivers floor mat that came
brush with a mixture of mild soap with your vehicle hooks over the
and warm water to clean them. Do floor mat anchor. This keeps the
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning floor mat from sliding forward and
solvents. Let the belts air dry before possibly interfering with the pedals.
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat If you remove the drivers floor mat,
belt anchors can cause the belts to make sure to re-anchor it when you
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of put it back in your vehicle.
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

343
Main Menu Table of Contents

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS


blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard, or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.

LOCK TAB

1. Raise the wiper arm off the 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
windshield. from the wiper arm by pushing in
Front windshield: Raise the drivers the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
side first, then the passengers while you push the blade assembly
side. toward the base of the arm.

Do not open the hood when the wiper


arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

344
Main Menu Table of Contents

Wiper Blades

BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the


BLADE holder until the tabs lock.

6. Slide the wiper blade assembly


onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm against the


windshield.
Front windshield: Lower the
passengers side first, then the
REINFORCEMENT drivers side.

3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If

Maintenance
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

345
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines LX and EX


tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of Normal Driving
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding Front: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
comfort. 235/65R16 103T 2.3 kgf/cm )
The following pages give more Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, 2.4 kgf/cm )
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to EX with Leather and Canadian
fail from being overheated. Touring models
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for
Overinflated tires can make your Normal Driving
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are Front: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road 235/65R16 103T 2.4 kgf/cm )
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly. Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
be seriously hurt or killed. 2.4 kgf/cm )
On U.S. Touring model only
Follow all instructions in this The tire pressure monitoring system The compact spare tire pressure is:
owners manual regarding tire (TPMS) warns you when a tire 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
inflation and maintenance. pressure is low. See page 303 for
more information.

We recommend that you visually


check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

346
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

U.S. Touring model Check the air pressures when the You should get your own tire
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for tires are cold. This means the pressure gauge and use it whenever
Normal Driving vehicle has been parked for at least you check your tire pressures. This
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa , three hours, or driven less than 1 will make it easier for you to tell if a
235-710R460A 2.3 kgf/cm ) mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if pressure loss is due to a tire problem
104T Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa , needed, to match the recommended and not due to a variation between
2.4 kgf/cm ) cold tire pressures. gauges.

For convenience, the recommended If you check the pressure when the Tire Inspection
tire sizes and cold air pressures are tires are hot [driven for several miles Every time you check inflation, you
on a label on the drivers doorjamb. (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 should also examine the tires for
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Tire pressure for high speed driving 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
is the same as for normal driving. reading. This is normal; do not You should look for:

Maintenance
release air to match the cold
For additional technical information, pressure. The tires will be Bumps or bulges in the tread or
see page 390 . underinflated. side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Use a gauge to measure the air Tubeless tires have some ability to
pressure at least once a month. Even self-seal if they are punctured. You Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
tires that are in good condition may should look closely for punctures if a of the tire. Replace the tire if you
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 tire starts losing pressure. can see fabric or cord.
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at Excessive tread wear.
the same time.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

347
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation


In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if


you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Your vehicles tires have tread wear balanced. This increases riding
indicators molded into the tread. comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
When the tread wears down to that have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
point, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 balance. the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
mm) wide band running across the km). Move the tires to the positions
tread. This shows there is less than On some models shown in the chart each time they
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on are rotated. If you purchase
the tire. A tire that is this worn gives directional tires, rotate only front-to-
very little traction on wet roads. You Improper wheel weights can damage back.
should replace the tire if you can see your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use
the tread wear indicator in three or only genuine Honda wheel weights f or
more places around the tire. balancing.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

348
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Replacing Tires Wheels and Tires


Replace your tires with radial tires of Wheel:
the same size, load range, speed Installing improper tires on your LX, and EX models
rating, and maximum cold tire vehicle can affect handling and 16 x 7J
pressure rating (as shown on the stability. This can cause a crash
tires sidewall). Mixing radial and in which you can be seriously Touring model
bias-ply tires on your vehicle can hurt or killed. 225 x 460A
reduce braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy. Using tires of a Always use the size and type of Tire:
different size or construction can tires recommended in this LX, and EX models
cause the ABS to work inconsistently. owners manual. 235/65R16 103T

It is best to replace all four tires at Touring model


the same time. If that is not possible 235-710R460A 104T

Maintenance
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. If you See page 389 for DOT tire quality
replace just the front tires, move the grading information, and page
rear tires to the front, and install the 390 for tire size information.
new tires on the rear. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your Replacement wheels are available at
vehicles handling. your dealer.

If you ever replace a wheel, make


sure that the wheels specifications
match those of the original wheels.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

349
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Winter Driving Tire Chains


Tires marked M S or All Because your vehicle has limited tire
Season on the sidewall have an all- clearance, mount only SAE Class S Traction devices that are the wrong
weather tread design suitable for cable-type traction devices, with size or improperly installed can
most winter driving conditions. rubber chain tensioners on the front damage your vehicles brake lines,
tires. Use traction devices only when suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
For the best performance in snowy required by driving conditions or driving if they are hitting any part of
or icy conditions, you should install local laws. Make sure they are the the vehicle.
snow tires or tire chains. They may correct size for your tires. Metal link-
be required by local laws under type chains should not be used.
certain conditions.
When installing cables, follow the
Snow Tires manufacturers instructions, and
If you mount snow tires on your mount them as tight as you can.
vehicle, make sure they are radial Make sure they are not contacting
tires of the same size and load range the brake lines or suspension. Drive
as original tires. Mount snow tires on slowly with them installed. If you
all four wheels. The traction hear them coming into contact with
provided by snow tires on dry roads the body or chassis, stop and
may be lower than your original tires. investigate. Remove them as soon as
Check with the tire dealer for you begin driving on cleared roads.
maximum speed recommendations.
For tire chain information on the
For snow tire information on the Touring model, see page 351 .
Touring model, see page 351 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

350
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Michelin PAX System There are no snow tires compatible Important Precautions
On U.S. Touring model only with the PAX system, and not all tire Never use a tire repair agent in a
Your vehicle is equipped with the chains are suitable for use on the PAX system tire, and never repair
Michelin PAX System which, PAX system tires. To prevent tire a PAX system tire by yourself.
together with the Tire Pressure chain damage to your PAX system Repair or replacement must be
Monitoring System (TPMS), enables tire or wheel, ensure that no part of done a Honda dealer or an
you to continue driving even if one or the chain contacts the PAX system. authorized Michelin PAX system
more of your tires loses its pressure. dealer.
Do not replace the PAX system tires
The tires and wheels on your vehicle and wheels with conventional tires If you must continue driving with a
are specially designed for the PAX and wheels. Doing so would disable flat tire, follow all the procedures
system, and the PAX system is the PAX system and the tire and precautions described on page
specifically designed and fine-tuned pressure monitoring system (TPMS), 356.
for your vehicle. and may void your new vehicle

Maintenance
warranty.
Because of these reasons, use only
the wheels and tires designated in
this owners manual. Never mix PAX
system wheels or tires with
conventional wheels or tires.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

351
Main Menu Table of Contents

Checking the Battery

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicles
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative () cable first, and
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last.
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion. The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
If additional battery maintenance is operation.
needed, see your dealer or a
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the
monthly by looking at the test battery to explode with enough
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
battery explains the test indicators terminals, and related accessories
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

352
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Storage

If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than one breathable cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle twice).
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. Preferably, do this once a month.

Wash and dry the exterior Support the front and rear wiper

Maintenance
completely. blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield.
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry. To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
the transmission in Park. vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

353
Main Menu

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

354
Main Menu

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more Driving with a Flat Tire ................ 356
common problems that motorists Compact Spare Tire....................... 359
experience with their vehicles. It Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 360
gives you information about how to If the Engine Wont Start .............. 366
safely evaluate the problem and what Nothing Happens or the
to do to correct it. If the problem has Starter Motor Operates
stranded you on the side of the road, Very Slowly......................... 366
you may be able to get going again. The Starter Operates
If not, you will also find instructions Normally ................................. 366
on getting your vehicle towed. Jump Starting ................................. 367
If the Engine Overheats ............... 369
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 371
Charging System Indicator........... 371
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 372
Readiness Codes ............................ 372
Brake System Indicator ................ 373

Taking Care of the Unexpected


Closing the Moonroof ................... 374
Fuses ............................................... 375
Fuse Locations ............................... 375
Emergency Towing ....................... 381

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

355
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving With a Flat Tire

Michelin PAX System


On U.S. Touring model only
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Michelin PAX system. Since each
Michelin PAX system tire has an
inner support ring that allows it to
continue running without air, it may
be difficult to immediately judge
from its appearance if a tire is
punctured. Your vehicle is also
equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), and this
system may be your first detection of
a flat tire. The TPMS monitors the air pressure was probably a natural loss of the air
of all four tires whenever the ignition pressure and you can continue
switch is in the ON (II) position. It driving as before.
will immediately sense if a tire starts
to lose its pressure, and give you If the indicator and the message
warning with the low tire pressure come on again, you probably have a
indicator in the instrument panel and flat tire. In this case, you will see a
a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE PAX SYSTEM WARNING
message on the multi-information message in the multi-information
display. If the indicator and the display.
warning message do not come back
on again after you inflate the tire to
the specified value (see page 346 ), it
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

356
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving With a Flat Tire

With the PAX system tires, you can


drive up to about 125 miles (200 km)
even if one or more of your tires are
punctured. This allows you to drive
to the nearest Honda dealer or
authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer to have the tire(s) repaired.

If you get a flat tire, never try to


repair it yourself, and never replace a
flat tire with a compact spare tire.

Follow the instructions shown by the


multi-information display, and drive The above message shows that you If the display changes to the above
very carefully. are driving your vehicle on a flat tire, message, it means that RUN FLAT
and should observe the RUN FLAT DRIVING is nearing the limit, and

Taking Care of the Unexpected


DRIVING speed limit of 50 mph you have to stop driving soon. Take
(80 km/h). Drive to your nearest your vehicle to the nearest Honda
Honda dealer or authorized Michelin dealer or authorized Michelin PAX
PAX system dealer, or call the PAX system dealer as soon as possible.
help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-5473).

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

357
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving With a Flat Tire

vehicle behind another vehicle with a Stop driving immediately when


rope or chain. Flat-bed equipment is you see a RUN FLAT LIMIT
the only way to transport your STOP DRIVING message on the
vehicle. multi-information display.
Continuous driving after this
Important Safety Precautions message will make it impossible to
Although your vehicle is capable of repair the tire.
run flat driving, you should always
observe the following: If you cannot find a Honda dealer or
an authorized Michelin PAX system
Do not drive faster than 50 mph dealer where you are driving, call the
(80 km/h). PAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-8473).
If you see the above message on the Drive carefully. Your vehicle may
multi-information display, you have handle differently from when the
reached the limit of run flat driving, tires are properly inflated,
and you should stop driving especially when cornering.
immediately. Be aware that if you
continue to drive, the noise and In its run flat mode, a PAX system
vibration level from the tire will tire is somewhat noisier than when
increase significantly, and the tire it is fully inflated, this is normal.
may no longer be repairable.

Call a professional towing service


who can transport your vehicle on
flat-bed equipment. Never tow your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

358
Main Menu Table of Contents

Compact Spare Tire

All models except U.S. Touring Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Use the compact spare tire as a compact spare tire.
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Do not use the compact spare tire
and put it back on your vehicle as if you are towing a trailer.
soon as you can.
Do not use your compact spare
Check the inflation pressure of the tire on another vehicle unless it is
compact spare tire every time you the same make and model.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to: Turn off the VSA system (see
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) pages 301 and 302 ). Driving with TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
the compact spare tire may
Follow these precautions: activate the VSA. Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) replacement should be the same size

Taking Care of the Unexpected


under any circumstances. and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
This tire gives a harsher ride and designed to be mounted on a regular
less traction on some road sur- wheel, and the spare wheel is not
faces. Use greater caution while designed for mounting a regular tire.
driving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

359
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving, SPARE TIRE


stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll off


the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
TOOLS JACK
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. The jack is behind a cover in the
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the cargo area on the drivers side,
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park. Apply the and tools are on the back of the
jack. parking brake. If you are towing a cover. Remove the cover by
trailer, unhitch the trailer. pushing the tabs down and pulling
the cover out.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to 4. Turn the jacks end
LOCK (0). Have all the counterclockwise to loosen it, then
passengers get out of the vehicle remove the jack.
while you change the tire.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

360
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

WHEEL NUTS

5. The spare tire is stored behind a 7. On EX model 9. Place the jack under the jacking
cover on the sidewall of the cargo If you are changing a rear tire, point nearest the tire you need to
area on the drivers side. close the sliding door. Then turn change. Turn the end bracket

Taking Care of the Unexpected


off the sliding door MAIN switch. clockwise until the top of the jack
Remove the cover by holding the contacts the jacking point. Make
two handles and pulling the cover 8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn sure the jacking point tab is
out. with the wheel nut wrench. resting in the jack notch.

6. Unscrew the wing bolt, and take


the spare tire out of its holder.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

361
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

EXTENSION WHEEL COVER

WHEEL
WRENCH HAB

10.Use the extension and the wheel On LX model 12.Before mounting the spare tire,
nut wrench as shown to raise the Do not attempt to forcibly pry the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the wheel cover off with a screwdriver or surface of the wheel and hub with
ground. other tool. The wheel cover cannot a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
be removed without first removing carefully; it may be hot from
11.Remove the wheel nuts, then the wheel nuts. driving.
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

362
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

13.Put on the spare tire. Put the BRACKET MOUNTING BOLT


wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.

14. Lower the vehicle to the ground,


and remove the jack.
BRACKET

15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 17.Remove the bracket from the jack
the same crisscross pattern. Have storage area by unscrewing the
the wheel nut torque checked at bracket mounting bolt.

Taking Care of the Unexpected


the nearest automotive service
facility. 18.You will find a u-shaped slit on the
Tighten the wheel nuts to: carpet behind the seat bottom of
94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm) the third seat. Pull up the carpet at
the slit, and remove the plastic
16.Put the flat tire in the supplied screw with a coin.
vinyl bag. This bag is in the jack
storage area.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

363
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

19.Adjust the seat-back of the third BRACKET 21.Store the jack in its holder. To
seat to an upright position. Install store the jack, align the locator
the bracket mounting bolt on the stud in the holder with the hole in
attachment point as shown, and the jack base. Turn the jacks end
tighten the bolt. Make sure the bracket clockwise to lock it in
bracket is securely locked. place. Store the tools in the
holders on the back of the jack
storage cover.

22.Store the plastic screw in a


noticeable place.
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
Make sure to reinstall the plastic
20.Install the flat tire on the bracket screw after the flat tire is repaired
with the inside of the wheel facing and installed on the vehicle.
toward you. Install the tire
mounting wing bolt to the bracket 23. On LX model
through one of the five wheel nut Store the wheel cover in the spare
holes as shown. Poke a hole in the tire storage area.
vinyl bag as needed. Secure the
flat tire by tightening the wing bolt.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

364
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

24. Install the spare tire storage cover. Storing a Flat Tire on the Folded
Third Seat
When the third seat is folded, the
flat tire is secured to the floor on top
Loose items can fly around the of the folded seat.
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants. 1. Pull up the U-shaped carpet piece,
fold it, and tack the end under the
Store the wheel, jack, and tools carpet.
securely before driving.
2. Remove the plastic screw as
described in the previous
procedure.
3. Place the flat tire face down on the
attachment point. Put the tire
mounting wing bolt in the

Taking Care of the Unexpected


attachment point through one of
the five wheel nut holes as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the wing
bolt.

4. Follow step 21 through 24 on page


364 .

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

365
Main Menu Table of Contents

If the Engine Wont Start

Diagnosing why the engine wont Check the transmission interlock. If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending The transmission must be in Park go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the or Neutral or the starter will not engine, either the battery is
key to START (III): operate. discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
You hear nothing, or almost Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). battery and terminal connections
nothing. The engines starter Turn on the headlights, and check (see page 352 ). You can then try
motor does not operate at all, or their brightness. If the headlights jump starting the vehicle from a
operates very slowly. are very dim or do not come on at booster battery (see page 367 ).
all, the battery is discharged. See
You can hear the starter motor Jump Starting on page 367 . The Starter Operates Normally
operating normally, or the starter In this case, the starter motors
motor sounds like it is spinning Turn the ignition switch to START speed sounds normal, or even faster
faster than normal, but the engine (III). If the headlights do not dim, than normal, when you turn the
does not start up and run. check the condition of the fuses. If ignition switch to START (III), but
the fuses are OK, there is the engine does not run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter probably something wrong with
Motor Operates Very Slowly the electrical circuit for the Are you using the proper starting
When you turn the ignition switch to ignition switch or starter motor. procedure? Refer to Starting the
START (III), you do not hear the You will need a qualified Engine on page 293 .
normal noise of the engine trying to technician to determine the
start. You may hear a clicking sound problem (see Emergency Towing
or series of clicks, or nothing at all. on page 381 ).
Check these things:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

366
Main Menu Table of Contents

If the Engine Wont Start, Jump Starting

Are you using a properly coded Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
key? An improperly coded key will Although this seems like a simple
cause the immobilizer system procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
indicator in the instrument panel precautions. physical condition of the battery.
to blink rapidly (see page 129 ). In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel seems slushy or frozen, do not try
gauge; the low fuel indicator may A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
not be working. not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
There may be an electrical nearby.
problem, such as no power to the If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can f reeze.
(see page 376 ). and smoking materials away Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
from the battery. battery can cause it to rupture.
If you find nothing wrong, you will

Taking Care of the Unexpected


need a qualified technician to find 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
the problem. See Emergency You cannot start your vehicle by sories: heater, A/C, climate
Towing on page 381 . pushing or pulling it. control, audio system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.

CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

367
Main Menu Table of Contents

Jump Starting

5. If the booster battery is in another


vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start the vehicle. If the starter


motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

7. Once the vehicle is running,


BOOSTER disconnect the negative cable from
BATTERY your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
The numbers in the illustration 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from the vehicle,
show you the order to connect the to the negative () terminal on and then from the booster battery.
jumper cables. the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap Keep the ends of the jumper cables
3. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this away from each other and any metal
positive () terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of on the vehicle until everything is
vehicles battery. Connect the the engine. disconnected. Otherwise, you may
other end to the positive () cause an electrical short.
terminal on the booster battery.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

368
Main Menu Table of Contents

If the Engine Overheats

The pointer of the vehicles 3. If you do not see steam or spray,


temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Park, and the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.

Taking Care of the Unexpected


Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the hood, turn
serious damage to your engine. off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

369
Main Menu Table of Contents

If the Engine Overheats

5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, 9. Start the engine, and set the
such as a split radiator hose. temperature control dial to
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap maximum (climate control to
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can FULL AUTO at 90F/32C). Add
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray out, coolant to the radiator up to the
continue driving (see Emergency seriously scalding you. base of the filler neck. If you do
Towing on page 381 ). not have the proper coolant
Always let the engine and mixture available, you can add
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before plain water. Remember to have
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. the cooling system drained and
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant refilled with the proper mixture as
if the level is below the MIN mark. soon as you can.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
7. If there was no coolant in the cloth, turn the radiator cap 10. Put the radiator cap back on
reserve tank, you may need to add counterclockwise, without pushing tightly. Run the engine, and watch
coolant to the radiator. Let the down, to the first stop. After the the temperature gauge. If it goes
engine cool down until the pointer pressure releases, push down on back to the red mark, the engine
reaches the middle of the tempera- the cap, and turn it until it comes needs repair (see Emergency
ture gauge, or lower, before check- off. Towing on page 381 ).
ing the radiator.
11. If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

370
Main Menu Table of Contents

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
This indicator should never warning indicators. If the charging system
come on when the engine is indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very Open the hood, and check the oil battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 281 ). An engine
damage is possible and you should very low on oil can lose pressure Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving accessories. Try not to use other
maneuvers. electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil level back to the full mark on the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical dipstick (see page 328 ).
damage almost immediately. Turn of f Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil where you can get technical

Taking Care of the Unexpected


the vehicle stopped. pressure indicator. If it does not go assistance.
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
On Touring model engine. There is a mechanical On Touring model
You will also see a CHECK problem that needs to be repaired You will also see a CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL message in before you can continue driving CHARGING SYSTEM message in
the multi-information display when (see Emergency Towing on page the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on. 381 ). this indicator comes on.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

371
Main Menu Table of Contents

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp If your vehicle battery has been


disconnected or gone dead, these
If this indicator comes on If you keep driving with the codes are erased. It takes at least
while driving, it means one malf unction indicator lamp on, you can three days of driving under various
of the engines emissions control damage your vehicles emissions conditions to set the codes again.
systems may have a problem. Even controls and engine. Those repairs may
though you may feel no difference in not be covered by your vehicles To check if they are set, turn the
your vehicles performance, warranties. ignition switch to ON (II), without
continued operation may cause starting the engine. The malfunction
serious damage. This indicator may also come on indicator lamp will come on for 20
along with the D indicator. seconds. If it then goes off, the
If you have recently refueled your readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
vehicle, the indicator could come on On Touring model times, the readiness codes are not
because of a loose or missing fuel fill You will also see a CHECK set. If possible, do not take your
cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at EMISSION SYSTEM message in vehicle for a state emissions test
least three times. Tightening the cap the multi-information display when until the readiness codes are set.
will not turn the indicator turn off this indicator comes on. Refer to State Emissions Testing
immediately; it takes at least three for more information (see page 395 ).
days of normal driving. Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain readiness
If the indicator remains on, or the codes that are part of the on-board
fuel cap was not loose or missing, diagnostics for the emissions
have your vehicle checked by a systems. In some states, part of the
dealer as soon as possible. emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

372
Main Menu Table of Contents

Brake System Indicator

U.S. Canada The brake system However, if the brake pedal does not If you must drive the vehicle a short
indicator normally feel normal, you should take distance in this condition, drive
comes on when you immediate action. A problem in one slowly and carefully.
turn the ignition switch to ON (II), part of the systems dual circuit
and as a reminder to check the design will still give you braking at If the ABS indicator and the VSA
parking brake. It will stay on if you two wheels. You will feel the brake indicator come on with the brake
do not fully release the parking pedal go down much farther before system indicator, have the vehicle
brake. the vehicle begins to slow down, and inspected by your dealer
If the brake system indicator comes you will have to press harder on the immediately.
on while driving, the brake fluid level pedal.
is probably low. Press lightly on the On Touring model
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. Slow down by shifting to a lower You will also see a CHECK BRAKE
If it does, check the brake fluid level gear, and pull to the side of the road SYSTEM message on the multi-
the next time you stop at a service when it is safe. Because of the long information display when this
station (see page 335 ). distance needed to stop, it is indicator comes on.
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You

Taking Care of the Unexpected


If the fluid level is low, take your should have it towed and repaired as
vehicle to a dealer, and have the soon as possible (see Emergency
brake system inspected for leaks or Towing on page 381 ).
worn brake pads.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

373
Main Menu Table of Contents

Closing the Moonroof

If the electric motor will not close


the moonroof, do the following: SOCKET

1. Check the fuse for the moonroof


motor (see page 379 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.

2. Try closing the moonroof. If the


new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the ROUND PLUG
moonroof manually.
4. Use a screwdriver or coin to 5. Insert the moonroof wrench into
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of remove the round plug in the the socket behind this plug. Turn
the tool kit in the cargo area. center of the headliner. the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.

6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the


round plug.

If you need to close the moonroof


manually, it means the moonroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

374
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

DRIVERS SIDE INTERIOR PASSENGERS SIDE PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


INTERIOR

The vehicles fuses are contained in To open the passengers fuse box, SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
four fuse boxes (three, if the vehicle pull the right edge of the cover.
does not have a rear entertainment

Taking Care of the Unexpected


system). The primary under-hood fuse box is
The interior fuse boxes are located on the passengers side. To open it,
under the dashboard on the drivers push the tabs as shown.
and passengers side.
The secondary under-hood fuse box
is behind the primary fuse box.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

375
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses


FUSE
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
378 through 380 , or the diagram on
the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. The diagram for
the interior drivers side fuse box is
on the kick panel below the fuse box.
Check those fuses first, but check all BLOWN
the fuses before deciding that a FUSE PULLER
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
works. the primary under-hood fuse box under-hood fuse box and all the
by looking through the top at the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK wire inside. Removing these fuses pulling out each fuse with the fuse
(0). Make sure the headlights and requires a Phillips-head puller provided in the primary
all other accessories are off. screwdriver. under-hood fuse box.

2. Remove the cover from the fuse


box.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

376
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the


BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time,
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem with your
from one of the other circuits. Make vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
sure you can do without that circuit that circuit, and have your vehicle
temporarily (such as the accessory checked by a qualified mechanic.
power socket or radio).
If the drivers power window fuse is
If you replace the blown fuse with a removed, the AUTO feature of the
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it drivers window will be disabled. You
might blow out again. This does not should reset the AUTO feature (see
indicate anything wrong. Replace the page 162 ).
5. Look for a burned wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as
fuse. If it is burned, replace the soon as you can. On EX, and Touring models
fuse with one of the spare fuses of If the radio fuse is removed, the

Taking Care of the Unexpected


the same rating or lower. audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
Replacing a f use with one that has a will see in the frequency
higher rating greatly increases the display. Use the preset buttons to
chances of damaging the electrical enter the five-digit code (see page
system. If you do not have a 229 ).
replacement f use with the proper
rating f or the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
CONTINUED
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

377
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuse Locations

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 10 A Left Headlight Low 13 20 A Horn, Stop


2 30 A Rear Defroster Coil 14 30 A Defroster
3 10 A Left Headlight High 15 40 A Back Up
4 15 A Small Lights 16 15 A Hazard
5 10 A Right Headlight Low 17 30 A VSA Motor
6 10 A Right He